1/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
18static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
19static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
20
21/*
22 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
23 */
24    int
25get_indent()
26{
27    return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
28}
29
30/*
31 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
32 */
33    int
34get_indent_lnum(lnum)
35    linenr_T	lnum;
36{
37    return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
38}
39
40#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
41/*
42 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
43 * "buf".
44 */
45    int
46get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
47    buf_T	*buf;
48    linenr_T	lnum;
49{
50    return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
51}
52#endif
53
54/*
55 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
56 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
57 */
58    int
59get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
60    char_u	*ptr;
61    int		ts;
62{
63    int		count = 0;
64
65    for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
66    {
67	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
68	    count += ts - (count % ts);
69	else if (*ptr == ' ')
70	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
71	else
72	    break;
73    }
74    return count;
75}
76
77/*
78 * Set the indent of the current line.
79 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
80 * Caller must take care of undo.
81 * "flags":
82 *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
83 *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
84 *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
85 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
86 */
87    int
88set_indent(size, flags)
89    int		size;		    /* measured in spaces */
90    int		flags;
91{
92    char_u	*p;
93    char_u	*newline;
94    char_u	*oldline;
95    char_u	*s;
96    int		todo;
97    int		ind_len;	    /* measured in characters */
98    int		line_len;
99    int		doit = FALSE;
100    int		ind_done = 0;	    /* measured in spaces */
101    int		tab_pad;
102    int		retval = FALSE;
103    int		orig_char_len = -1; /* number of initial whitespace chars when
104				       'et' and 'pi' are both set */
105
106    /*
107     * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
108     * characters needed for the indent.
109     */
110    todo = size;
111    ind_len = 0;
112    p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
113
114    /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
115     * isn't already set */
116
117    /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs; if both 'expandtab' and
118     * 'preserveindent' are set count the number of characters at the
119     * beginning of the line to be copied */
120    if (!curbuf->b_p_et || (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi))
121    {
122	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
123	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
124	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
125	{
126	    ind_done = 0;
127
128	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
129	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
130	    {
131		if (*p == TAB)
132		{
133		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
134					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
135		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
136		    if (todo < tab_pad)
137			break;
138		    todo -= tab_pad;
139		    ++ind_len;
140		    ind_done += tab_pad;
141		}
142		else
143		{
144		    --todo;
145		    ++ind_len;
146		    ++ind_done;
147		}
148		++p;
149	    }
150
151	    /* Set initial number of whitespace chars to copy if we are
152	     * preserving indent but expandtab is set */
153	    if (curbuf->b_p_et)
154		orig_char_len = ind_len;
155
156	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
157	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
158	    if (todo >= tab_pad && orig_char_len == -1)
159	    {
160		doit = TRUE;
161		todo -= tab_pad;
162		++ind_len;
163		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
164	    }
165	}
166
167	/* count tabs required for indent */
168	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
169	{
170	    if (*p != TAB)
171		doit = TRUE;
172	    else
173		++p;
174	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
175	    ++ind_len;
176	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
177	}
178    }
179    /* count spaces required for indent */
180    while (todo > 0)
181    {
182	if (*p != ' ')
183	    doit = TRUE;
184	else
185	    ++p;
186	--todo;
187	++ind_len;
188	/* ++ind_done; */
189    }
190
191    /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
192    if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
193	return FALSE;
194
195    /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
196    if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
197	p = oldline;
198    else
199	p = skipwhite(p);
200    line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
201
202    /* If 'preserveindent' and 'expandtab' are both set keep the original
203     * characters and allocate accordingly.  We will fill the rest with spaces
204     * after the if (!curbuf->b_p_et) below. */
205    if (orig_char_len != -1)
206    {
207	newline = alloc(orig_char_len + size - ind_done + line_len);
208	if (newline == NULL)
209	    return FALSE;
210	todo = size - ind_done;
211	ind_len = orig_char_len + todo;    /* Set total length of indent in
212					    * characters, which may have been
213					    * undercounted until now  */
214	p = oldline;
215	s = newline;
216	while (orig_char_len > 0)
217	{
218	    *s++ = *p++;
219	    orig_char_len--;
220	}
221
222	/* Skip over any additional white space (useful when newindent is less
223	 * than old) */
224	while (vim_iswhite(*p))
225	    ++p;
226
227    }
228    else
229    {
230	todo = size;
231	newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
232	if (newline == NULL)
233	    return FALSE;
234	s = newline;
235    }
236
237    /* Put the characters in the new line. */
238    /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
239    if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
240    {
241	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
242	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
243	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
244	{
245	    p = oldline;
246	    ind_done = 0;
247
248	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
249	    {
250		if (*p == TAB)
251		{
252		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
253					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
254		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
255		    if (todo < tab_pad)
256			break;
257		    todo -= tab_pad;
258		    ind_done += tab_pad;
259		}
260		else
261		{
262		    --todo;
263		    ++ind_done;
264		}
265		*s++ = *p++;
266	    }
267
268	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
269	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
270	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
271	    {
272		*s++ = TAB;
273		todo -= tab_pad;
274	    }
275
276	    p = skipwhite(p);
277	}
278
279	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
280	{
281	    *s++ = TAB;
282	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
283	}
284    }
285    while (todo > 0)
286    {
287	*s++ = ' ';
288	--todo;
289    }
290    mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
291
292    /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
293    if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
294    {
295	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
296	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
297	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
298	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
299	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
300				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
301	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline);
302	retval = TRUE;
303    }
304    else
305	vim_free(newline);
306
307    curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
308    return retval;
309}
310
311/*
312 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
313 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
314 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
315 */
316    static int
317copy_indent(size, src)
318    int		size;
319    char_u	*src;
320{
321    char_u	*p = NULL;
322    char_u	*line = NULL;
323    char_u	*s;
324    int		todo;
325    int		ind_len;
326    int		line_len = 0;
327    int		tab_pad;
328    int		ind_done;
329    int		round;
330
331    /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
332     * Round 2: copy the characters. */
333    for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
334    {
335	todo = size;
336	ind_len = 0;
337	ind_done = 0;
338	s = src;
339
340	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
341	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
342	{
343	    if (*s == TAB)
344	    {
345		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
346					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
347		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
348		if (todo < tab_pad)
349		    break;
350		todo -= tab_pad;
351		ind_done += tab_pad;
352	    }
353	    else
354	    {
355		--todo;
356		++ind_done;
357	    }
358	    ++ind_len;
359	    if (p != NULL)
360		*p++ = *s;
361	    ++s;
362	}
363
364	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
365	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
366	if (todo >= tab_pad)
367	{
368	    todo -= tab_pad;
369	    ++ind_len;
370	    if (p != NULL)
371		*p++ = TAB;
372	}
373
374	/* Add tabs required for indent */
375	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
376	{
377	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
378	    ++ind_len;
379	    if (p != NULL)
380		*p++ = TAB;
381	}
382
383	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
384	while (todo > 0)
385	{
386	    --todo;
387	    ++ind_len;
388	    if (p != NULL)
389		*p++ = ' ';
390	}
391
392	if (p == NULL)
393	{
394	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
395	     * and the rest of the line. */
396	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
397	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
398	    if (line == NULL)
399		return FALSE;
400	    p = line;
401	}
402    }
403
404    /* Append the original line */
405    mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
406
407    /* Replace the line */
408    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
409
410    /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
411    curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
412    return TRUE;
413}
414
415/*
416 * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
417 * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
418 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
419 */
420    int
421get_number_indent(lnum)
422    linenr_T	lnum;
423{
424    colnr_T	col;
425    pos_T	pos;
426    regmmatch_T	regmatch;
427
428    if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
429	return -1;
430    pos.lnum = 0;
431    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
432    if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
433    {
434	regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
435	regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
436	if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum,
437							    (colnr_T)0, NULL))
438	{
439	    pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
440	    pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
441#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
442	    pos.coladd = 0;
443#endif
444	}
445	vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
446    }
447
448    if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
449	return -1;
450    getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
451    return (int)col;
452}
453
454#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
455
456static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
457
458/*
459 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
460 */
461    static int
462cin_is_cinword(line)
463    char_u	*line;
464{
465    char_u	*cinw;
466    char_u	*cinw_buf;
467    int		cinw_len;
468    int		retval = FALSE;
469    int		len;
470
471    cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
472    cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
473    if (cinw_buf != NULL)
474    {
475	line = skipwhite(line);
476	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
477	{
478	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
479	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
480		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
481	    {
482		retval = TRUE;
483		break;
484	    }
485	}
486	vim_free(cinw_buf);
487    }
488    return retval;
489}
490#endif
491
492/*
493 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
494 *
495 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
496 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
497 *
498 * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
499 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
500 * new line.
501 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
502 *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
503 *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
504 *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
505 *
506 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
507 */
508    int
509open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
510    int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
511    int		flags;
512    int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
513{
514    char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
515    char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
516    char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
517    int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
518    int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
519    pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
520    int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
521    int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
522    int		n;
523    int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
524    int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
525#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
526    int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
527    int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
528    char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
529    char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
530#endif
531    char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
532#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
533	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
534    char_u	*p;
535#endif
536    int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
537#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
538    pos_T	*pos;
539#endif
540#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
541    int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
542# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
543					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
544# endif
545			);
546    int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
547    int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
548#endif
549#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
550    int		vreplace_mode;
551#endif
552    int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
553    int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
554
555    /*
556     * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
557     */
558    saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
559    if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
560	return FALSE;
561
562#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
563    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
564    {
565	/*
566	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
567	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
568	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
569	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
570	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
571	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
572	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
573	 */
574	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
575	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
576	else
577	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
578	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
579	    goto theend;
580
581	/*
582	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
583	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
584	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
585	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
586	 * etc) a bit later.
587	 */
588	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
589	replace_push(NUL);
590	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
591	while (*p != NUL)
592	{
593#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
594	    if (has_mbyte)
595		p += replace_push_mb(p);
596	    else
597#endif
598		replace_push(*p++);
599	}
600	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
601    }
602#endif
603
604    if ((State & INSERT)
605#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
606	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
607#endif
608	    )
609    {
610	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
611#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
612	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
613	{
614	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
615	    first_char = *p;
616	}
617#endif
618#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
619	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
620#endif
621	saved_char = *p_extra;
622	*p_extra = NUL;
623    }
624
625    u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
626#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
627    did_si = FALSE;
628#endif
629    ai_col = 0;
630
631    /*
632     * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
633     * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
634     * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
635     */
636    if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
637	trunc_line = TRUE;
638
639    /*
640     * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
641     * indent to use for the new line.
642     */
643    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
644#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
645			|| do_si
646#endif
647					    )
648    {
649	/*
650	 * count white space on current line
651	 */
652	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
653	if (newindent == 0)
654	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
655
656#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
657	/*
658	 * Do smart indenting.
659	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
660	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
661	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
662	 *	"if (condition) {"
663	 */
664	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
665				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
666	{
667	    char_u  *ptr;
668	    char_u  last_char;
669
670	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
671	    ptr = saved_line;
672# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
673	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
674		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
675	    else
676		lead_len = 0;
677# endif
678	    if (dir == FORWARD)
679	    {
680		/*
681		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
682		 * recognised as comments.
683		 */
684		if (
685# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
686			lead_len == 0 &&
687# endif
688			ptr[0] == '#')
689		{
690		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
691			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
692		    newindent = get_indent();
693		}
694# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
695		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
696		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
697		else
698		    lead_len = 0;
699		if (lead_len > 0)
700		{
701		    /*
702		     * This case gets the following right:
703		     *	    \*
704		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
705		     *	     *\
706		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
707		     *	    This should line up here;
708		     */
709		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
710		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
711			p++;
712		    if (p[0] == '*')
713		    {
714			for (p++; *p; p++)
715			{
716			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
717			    {
718				/*
719				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
720				 * with the line containing the start of
721				 * the comment
722				 */
723				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
724				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
725				{
726				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
727				    newindent = get_indent();
728				}
729			    }
730			}
731		    }
732		}
733		else	/* Not a comment line */
734# endif
735		{
736		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
737		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
738		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
739			--p;
740		    last_char = *p;
741
742		    /*
743		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
744		     */
745		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
746		    {
747			if (p > ptr)
748			    --p;
749			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
750			    --p;
751		    }
752		    /*
753		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
754		     * lines.  eg:
755		     *	    if (condition &&
756		     *			condition) {
757		     *		Should line up here!
758		     *	    }
759		     */
760		    if (*p == ')')
761		    {
762			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
763			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
764			{
765			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
766			    newindent = get_indent();
767			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
768			}
769		    }
770		    /*
771		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
772		     * checking for "if" and the like.
773		     */
774		    if (last_char == '{')
775		    {
776			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
777			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
778		    }
779		    /*
780		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
781		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
782		     * '}'.
783		     */
784		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
785						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
786			did_si = TRUE;
787		}
788	    }
789	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
790	    {
791		/*
792		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
793		 * recognised as comments.
794		 */
795		if (
796# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
797			lead_len == 0 &&
798# endif
799			ptr[0] == '#')
800		{
801		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
802
803		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
804			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
805		    {
806			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
807			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
808			else
809			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
810			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
811		    }
812		    if (was_backslashed)
813			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
814		    else
815			newindent = get_indent();
816		}
817		p = skipwhite(ptr);
818		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
819		    did_si = TRUE;
820		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
821		    can_si_back = TRUE;
822	    }
823	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
824	}
825	if (do_si)
826	    can_si = TRUE;
827#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
828
829	did_ai = TRUE;
830    }
831
832#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
833    /*
834     * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
835     * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
836     */
837    end_comment_pending = NUL;
838    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
839	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
840    else
841	lead_len = 0;
842    if (lead_len > 0)
843    {
844	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
845	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
846	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
847	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
848	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
849	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
850	int	current_flag;
851	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
852	char_u	*p2;
853
854	/*
855	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
856	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
857	 */
858	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
859	{
860	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
861	    {
862		require_blank = TRUE;
863		continue;
864	    }
865	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
866	    {
867		current_flag = *p;
868		if (*p == COM_START)
869		{
870		    /*
871		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
872		     */
873		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
874		    {
875			lead_len = 0;
876			break;
877		    }
878
879		    /* find start of middle part */
880		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
881		    require_blank = FALSE;
882		}
883
884		/*
885		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
886		 */
887		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
888		{
889		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
890			require_blank = TRUE;
891		    ++p;
892		}
893		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
894
895		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
896		{
897		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
898		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
899			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
900		    ++p;
901		}
902		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
903
904		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
905		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
906
907		/*
908		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
909		 * the comment leader.
910		 */
911		if (dir == FORWARD)
912		{
913		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
914			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
915			{
916			    comment_end = p;
917			    lead_len = 0;
918			    break;
919			}
920		}
921
922		/*
923		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
924		 */
925		if (lead_len > 0)
926		{
927		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
928		    {
929			lead_repl = lead_middle;
930			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
931		    }
932
933		    /*
934		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
935		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
936		     * comment leader on the next line.
937		     */
938		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
939			    && ((p_extra != NULL
940				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
941				|| (p_extra == NULL
942				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
943				|| require_blank))
944			extra_space = TRUE;
945		}
946		break;
947	    }
948	    if (*p == COM_END)
949	    {
950		/*
951		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
952		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
953		 * start (for C-comments).
954		 */
955		if (dir == FORWARD)
956		{
957		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
958		    lead_len = 0;
959		    break;
960		}
961
962		/*
963		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
964		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
965		 */
966		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
967		    --p;
968		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
969					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
970		    ;
971		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
972
973		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
974		 * the comment-end */
975		extra_space = TRUE;
976
977		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
978		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
979		{
980		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
981			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
982		}
983		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
984		{
985		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
986		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
987			p2++;
988		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
989		}
990		break;
991	    }
992	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
993	    {
994		/*
995		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
996		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
997		 */
998		if (dir == BACKWARD)
999		    lead_len = 0;
1000		else
1001		{
1002		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
1003		    lead_repl_len = 0;
1004		}
1005		break;
1006	    }
1007	}
1008	if (lead_len)
1009	{
1010	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
1011	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
1012							      extra_len + 1);
1013	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
1014
1015	    if (leader == NULL)
1016		lead_len = 0;
1017	    else
1018	    {
1019		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
1020
1021		/*
1022		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
1023		 */
1024		if (lead_repl != NULL)
1025		{
1026		    int		c = 0;
1027		    int		off = 0;
1028
1029		    for (p = lead_flags; *p != NUL && *p != ':'; )
1030		    {
1031			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
1032			    c = *p++;
1033			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
1034			    off = getdigits(&p);
1035			else
1036			    ++p;
1037		    }
1038		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
1039		    {
1040			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
1041			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1042						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1043			    ;
1044			++p;
1045
1046#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1047			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1048			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1049			{
1050			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1051							       lead_repl_len);
1052			    int	    old_size = 0;
1053			    char_u  *endp = p;
1054			    int	    l;
1055
1056			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1057			    {
1058				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
1059				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1060			    }
1061			    l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p);
1062			    if (l != 0)
1063				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1064					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1065			    lead_len += l;
1066			}
1067#else
1068			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1069			    p = leader;
1070			else
1071			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1072#endif
1073			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1074			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1075			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1076
1077			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1078			while (--p >= leader)
1079			{
1080#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1081			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1082
1083			    if (l > 1)
1084			    {
1085				p -= l;
1086				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1087				{
1088				    p[1] = ' ';
1089				    --l;
1090				}
1091				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1092				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1093				lead_len -= l;
1094				*p = ' ';
1095			    }
1096			    else
1097#endif
1098			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1099				*p = ' ';
1100			}
1101		    }
1102		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1103		    {
1104			p = skipwhite(leader);
1105#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1106			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1107			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1108			 * not to be overwritten. */
1109			{
1110			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1111							       lead_repl_len);
1112			    int	    i;
1113			    int	    l;
1114
1115			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1116			    {
1117				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1118				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1119				    break;
1120			    }
1121			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1122			    {
1123				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1124				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (p - leader)));
1125				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1126			    }
1127			}
1128#endif
1129			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1130
1131			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1132			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1133			 * remain the same. */
1134			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1135			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1136			    {
1137				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1138				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1139				{
1140				    --lead_len;
1141				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1142						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1143				}
1144				else
1145				{
1146#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1147				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
1148
1149				    if (l > 1)
1150				    {
1151					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1152					{
1153					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1154					     * two spaces */
1155					    --l;
1156					    *p++ = ' ';
1157					}
1158					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1159						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1160					lead_len -= l - 1;
1161				    }
1162#endif
1163				    *p = ' ';
1164				}
1165			    }
1166			*p = NUL;
1167		    }
1168
1169		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1170		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1171#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1172					|| do_si
1173#endif
1174							   )
1175			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1176
1177		    /* Add the indent offset */
1178		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1179		    {
1180			off = -newindent;
1181			newindent = 0;
1182		    }
1183		    else
1184			newindent += off;
1185
1186		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1187		     * alignment remains equal. */
1188		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1189					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1190		    {
1191			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1192			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1193			    break;
1194			--lead_len;
1195			--off;
1196		    }
1197
1198		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1199		     * extra space */
1200		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1201			extra_space = FALSE;
1202		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1203		}
1204
1205		if (extra_space)
1206		{
1207		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1208		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1209		}
1210
1211		newcol = lead_len;
1212
1213		/*
1214		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1215		 * is in the comment leader
1216		 */
1217		if (newindent
1218#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1219				|| did_si
1220#endif
1221					   )
1222		{
1223		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1224		    {
1225			--lead_len;
1226			--newcol;
1227			++leader;
1228		    }
1229		}
1230
1231	    }
1232#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1233	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1234#endif
1235	}
1236	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1237	{
1238	    /*
1239	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1240	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1241	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1242	     * comment.
1243	     */
1244	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1245			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1246#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1247					|| do_si
1248#endif
1249							   ))
1250	    {
1251		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1252		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1253		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1254		{
1255		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1256		    newindent = get_indent();
1257		}
1258		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1259	    }
1260	}
1261    }
1262#endif
1263
1264    /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1265    if (p_extra != NULL)
1266    {
1267	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1268
1269	/*
1270	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1271	 * non-blank.
1272	 *
1273	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1274	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1275	 */
1276	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1277	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1278	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1279	{
1280	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1281#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1282		    && (!enc_utf8
1283			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1284#endif
1285		    )
1286	    {
1287		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1288		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1289		++p_extra;
1290		++less_cols_off;
1291	    }
1292	}
1293	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1294	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1295
1296	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1297	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1298    }
1299
1300    if (p_extra == NULL)
1301	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1302
1303#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1304    /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1305    if (lead_len)
1306    {
1307	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1308	p_extra = leader;
1309	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1310	less_cols -= lead_len;
1311    }
1312    else
1313	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1314#endif
1315
1316    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1317    if (dir == BACKWARD)
1318	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1319#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1320    if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1321#endif
1322    {
1323	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1324								      == FAIL)
1325	    goto theend;
1326	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1327	 * with markers. */
1328	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1329	did_append = TRUE;
1330    }
1331#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1332    else
1333    {
1334	/*
1335	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1336	 */
1337	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1338	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1339	{
1340	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1341	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1342	     */
1343	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1344	    vr_lines_changed++;
1345	}
1346	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1347	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1348	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1349	did_append = FALSE;
1350    }
1351#endif
1352
1353    if (newindent
1354#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1355		    || did_si
1356#endif
1357				)
1358    {
1359	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1360#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1361	if (did_si)
1362	{
1363	    if (p_sr)
1364		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1365	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1366	}
1367#endif
1368	/* Copy the indent */
1369	if (curbuf->b_p_ci)
1370	{
1371	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1372
1373	    /*
1374	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1375	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1376	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1377	     */
1378	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1379	}
1380	else
1381	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1382	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1383
1384	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1385
1386	/*
1387	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1388	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1389	 */
1390	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1391	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1392		replace_push(NUL);
1393	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1394#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1395	if (no_si)
1396	    did_si = FALSE;
1397#endif
1398    }
1399
1400#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1401    /*
1402     * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1403     * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1404     */
1405    if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1406	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1407	    replace_push(NUL);
1408#endif
1409
1410    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1411
1412    if (dir == FORWARD)
1413    {
1414	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1415	{
1416	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1417	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1418	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1419	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1420		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1421	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1422	    saved_line = NULL;
1423	    if (did_append)
1424	    {
1425		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1426					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1427		did_append = FALSE;
1428
1429		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1430		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1431		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1432					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1433							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1434	    }
1435	    else
1436		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1437	}
1438
1439	/*
1440	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1441	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1442	 */
1443	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1444    }
1445    if (did_append)
1446	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1447
1448    curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1449#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1450    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1451#endif
1452
1453#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1454    /*
1455     * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1456     * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1457     * normal INSERT mode.
1458     */
1459    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1460    {
1461	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1462	State = INSERT;
1463    }
1464    else
1465	vreplace_mode = 0;
1466#endif
1467#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1468    /*
1469     * May do lisp indenting.
1470     */
1471    if (!p_paste
1472# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1473	    && leader == NULL
1474# endif
1475	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1476	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1477    {
1478	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1479	p = ml_get_curline();
1480	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1481    }
1482#endif
1483#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1484    /*
1485     * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1486     */
1487    if (!p_paste
1488	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1489#  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1490		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1491#  endif
1492		)
1493	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1494		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1495		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1496    {
1497	do_c_expr_indent();
1498	p = ml_get_curline();
1499	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1500    }
1501#endif
1502#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1503    if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1504	State = vreplace_mode;
1505#endif
1506
1507#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1508    /*
1509     * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1510     * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1511     * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1512     */
1513    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1514    {
1515	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1516	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1517	if (p_extra == NULL)
1518	    goto theend;
1519
1520	/* Put back original line */
1521	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1522
1523	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1524	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1525#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1526	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1527#endif
1528	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1529	vim_free(p_extra);
1530	next_line = NULL;
1531    }
1532#endif
1533
1534    retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1535theend:
1536    curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1537    vim_free(saved_line);
1538    vim_free(next_line);
1539    vim_free(allocated);
1540    return retval;
1541}
1542
1543#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1544/*
1545 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1546 * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1547 * returned.
1548 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1549 * comment leader.
1550 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1551 */
1552    int
1553get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1554    char_u	*line;
1555    char_u	**flags;
1556    int		backward;
1557{
1558    int		i, j;
1559    int		got_com = FALSE;
1560    int		found_one;
1561    char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1562    char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1563    char_u	*list;
1564
1565    i = 0;
1566    while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1567	++i;
1568
1569    /*
1570     * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1571     */
1572    while (line[i])
1573    {
1574	/*
1575	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1576	 */
1577	found_one = FALSE;
1578	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1579	{
1580	    /*
1581	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1582	     * put string at start of string.
1583	     */
1584	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1585		*flags = list;
1586	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1587	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1588	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1589		continue;
1590	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1591
1592	    /*
1593	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1594	     * nested comments.
1595	     */
1596	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1597		continue;
1598
1599	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1600	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1601		continue;
1602
1603	    /*
1604	     * Line contents and string must match.
1605	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1606	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1607	     * TABs and spaces).
1608	     */
1609	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1610	    {
1611		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1612		    continue;
1613		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1614		    ++string;
1615	    }
1616	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1617		;
1618	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1619		continue;
1620
1621	    /*
1622	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1623	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1624	     */
1625	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1626			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1627		continue;
1628
1629	    /*
1630	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1631	     */
1632	    i += j;
1633	    got_com = TRUE;
1634	    found_one = TRUE;
1635	    break;
1636	}
1637
1638	/*
1639	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1640	 */
1641	if (!found_one)
1642	    break;
1643
1644	/*
1645	 * Include any trailing white space.
1646	 */
1647	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1648	    ++i;
1649
1650	/*
1651	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1652	 */
1653	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1654	    break;
1655    }
1656    return (got_com ? i : 0);
1657}
1658#endif
1659
1660/*
1661 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1662 */
1663    int
1664plines(lnum)
1665    linenr_T	lnum;
1666{
1667    return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1668}
1669
1670    int
1671plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1672    win_T	*wp;
1673    linenr_T	lnum;
1674    int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1675{
1676#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1677    /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1678     * is one line anyway. */
1679    return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1680}
1681
1682    int
1683plines_nofill(lnum)
1684    linenr_T	lnum;
1685{
1686    return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1687}
1688
1689    int
1690plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1691    win_T	*wp;
1692    linenr_T	lnum;
1693    int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1694{
1695#endif
1696    int		lines;
1697
1698    if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1699	return 1;
1700
1701#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1702    if (wp->w_width == 0)
1703	return 1;
1704#endif
1705
1706#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1707    /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1708    /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1709    if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1710	return 1;
1711#endif
1712
1713    lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1714    if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1715	return (int)wp->w_height;
1716    return lines;
1717}
1718
1719/*
1720 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1721 * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1722 */
1723    int
1724plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1725    win_T	*wp;
1726    linenr_T	lnum;
1727{
1728    char_u	*s;
1729    long	col;
1730    int		width;
1731
1732    s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1733    if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1734	return 1;
1735    col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1736
1737    /*
1738     * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1739     * extra column.
1740     */
1741    if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1742	col += 1;
1743
1744    /*
1745     * Add column offset for 'number', 'relativenumber' and 'foldcolumn'.
1746     */
1747    width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1748    if (width <= 0)
1749	return 32000;
1750    if (col <= width)
1751	return 1;
1752    col -= width;
1753    width += win_col_off2(wp);
1754    return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1755}
1756
1757/*
1758 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1759 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1760 */
1761    int
1762plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1763    win_T	*wp;
1764    linenr_T	lnum;
1765    long	column;
1766{
1767    long	col;
1768    char_u	*s;
1769    int		lines = 0;
1770    int		width;
1771
1772#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1773    /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1774     * is one line anyway. */
1775    lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1776#endif
1777
1778    if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1779	return lines + 1;
1780
1781#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1782    if (wp->w_width == 0)
1783	return lines + 1;
1784#endif
1785
1786    s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1787
1788    col = 0;
1789    while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1790    {
1791	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1792	mb_ptr_adv(s);
1793    }
1794
1795    /*
1796     * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1797     * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1798     * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1799     * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1800     * 'ts') -- webb.
1801     */
1802    if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1803	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1804
1805    /*
1806     * Add column offset for 'number', 'relativenumber', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1807     */
1808    width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1809    if (width <= 0)
1810	return 9999;
1811
1812    lines += 1;
1813    if (col > width)
1814	lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1;
1815    return lines;
1816}
1817
1818    int
1819plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1820    win_T	*wp;
1821    linenr_T	first, last;
1822{
1823    int		count = 0;
1824
1825    while (first <= last)
1826    {
1827#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1828	int	x;
1829
1830	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1831	 * that are maybe folded. */
1832	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1833	if (x > 0)
1834	{
1835	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1836	    first += x;
1837	}
1838	else
1839#endif
1840	{
1841#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1842	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1843		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1844	    else
1845#endif
1846		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1847	    ++first;
1848	}
1849    }
1850    return (count);
1851}
1852
1853#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1854/*
1855 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1856 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1857 */
1858    void
1859ins_bytes(p)
1860    char_u	*p;
1861{
1862    ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1863}
1864#endif
1865
1866#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1867	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1868/*
1869 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1870 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1871 */
1872    void
1873ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1874    char_u	*p;
1875    int		len;
1876{
1877    int		i;
1878# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1879    int		n;
1880
1881    if (has_mbyte)
1882	for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1883	{
1884	    if (enc_utf8)
1885		/* avoid reading past p[len] */
1886		n = utfc_ptr2len_len(p + i, len - i);
1887	    else
1888		n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1889	    ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1890	}
1891    else
1892# endif
1893	for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1894	    ins_char(p[i]);
1895}
1896#endif
1897
1898/*
1899 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1900 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1901 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1902 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1903 * convert bytes to a character.
1904 */
1905    void
1906ins_char(c)
1907    int		c;
1908{
1909#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1910    char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1911    int		n;
1912
1913    n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1914
1915    /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1916     * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1917    if (buf[0] == 0)
1918	buf[0] = '\n';
1919
1920    ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1921}
1922
1923    void
1924ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1925    char_u	*buf;
1926    int		charlen;
1927{
1928    int		c = buf[0];
1929#endif
1930    int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1931    int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1932    char_u	*p;
1933    char_u	*newp;
1934    char_u	*oldp;
1935    int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1936    colnr_T	col;
1937    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1938    int		i;
1939
1940#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1941    /* Break tabs if needed. */
1942    if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1943	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1944#endif
1945
1946    col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1947    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1948    linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1949
1950    /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1951    oldlen = 0;
1952#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1953    newlen = charlen;
1954#else
1955    newlen = 1;
1956#endif
1957
1958    if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1959    {
1960#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1961	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1962	{
1963	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1964	    colnr_T	vcol;
1965	    int		old_list;
1966#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1967	    char_u	buf[2];
1968#endif
1969
1970	    /*
1971	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1972	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1973	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1974	     */
1975	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1976	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1977		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1978
1979	    /*
1980	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1981	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1982	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1983	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1984	     */
1985	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1986#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1987	    buf[0] = c;
1988	    buf[1] = NUL;
1989#endif
1990	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1991	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1992	    {
1993		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1994		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1995		 * position. */
1996		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1997		    break;
1998#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1999		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
2000#else
2001		++oldlen;
2002#endif
2003		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
2004		if (vcol > new_vcol)
2005		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
2006	    }
2007	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
2008	}
2009	else
2010#endif
2011	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
2012	{
2013	    /* normal replace */
2014#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2015	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
2016#else
2017	    oldlen = 1;
2018#endif
2019	}
2020
2021
2022	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
2023	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
2024	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
2025	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
2026	replace_push(NUL);
2027	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
2028	{
2029#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2030	    if (has_mbyte)
2031		i += replace_push_mb(oldp + col + i) - 1;
2032	    else
2033#endif
2034		replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
2035	}
2036    }
2037
2038    newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
2039    if (newp == NULL)
2040	return;
2041
2042    /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2043    if (col > 0)
2044	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2045
2046    /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2047    p = newp + col;
2048    mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2049					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2050
2051    /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2052#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2053    mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2054    i = charlen;
2055#else
2056    *p = c;
2057    i = 1;
2058#endif
2059
2060    /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2061    while (i < newlen)
2062	p[i++] = ' ';
2063
2064    /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2065    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2066
2067    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2068    changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2069
2070    /*
2071     * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2072     * show the match for right parens and braces.
2073     */
2074    if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2075	    && msg_silent == 0
2076#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2077	    && charlen == 1
2078#endif
2079#ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
2080	    && !ins_compl_active()
2081#endif
2082       )
2083	showmatch(c);
2084
2085#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2086    if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2087#endif
2088    {
2089	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2090#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2091	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2092#else
2093	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2094#endif
2095    }
2096    /*
2097     * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2098     */
2099}
2100
2101/*
2102 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2103 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2104 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2105 */
2106    void
2107ins_str(s)
2108    char_u	*s;
2109{
2110    char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2111    int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2112    int		oldlen;
2113    colnr_T	col;
2114    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2115
2116#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2117    if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2118	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2119#endif
2120
2121    col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2122    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2123    oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2124
2125    newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2126    if (newp == NULL)
2127	return;
2128    if (col > 0)
2129	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2130    mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2131    mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2132    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2133    changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2134    curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2135}
2136
2137/*
2138 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2139 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2140 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2141 *
2142 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2143 */
2144    int
2145del_char(fixpos)
2146    int		fixpos;
2147{
2148#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2149    if (has_mbyte)
2150    {
2151	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2152	mb_adjust_cursor();
2153	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2154	    return FAIL;
2155	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2156    }
2157#endif
2158    return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
2159}
2160
2161#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2162/*
2163 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2164 */
2165    int
2166del_chars(count, fixpos)
2167    long	count;
2168    int		fixpos;
2169{
2170    long	bytes = 0;
2171    long	i;
2172    char_u	*p;
2173    int		l;
2174
2175    p = ml_get_cursor();
2176    for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2177    {
2178	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
2179	bytes += l;
2180	p += l;
2181    }
2182    return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
2183}
2184#endif
2185
2186/*
2187 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2188 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2189 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2190 *
2191 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2192 */
2193    int
2194del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine)
2195    long	count;
2196    int		fixpos_arg;
2197    int		use_delcombine UNUSED;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
2198{
2199    char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2200    colnr_T	oldlen;
2201    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2202    colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2203    int		was_alloced;
2204    long	movelen;
2205    int		fixpos = fixpos_arg;
2206
2207    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2208    oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2209
2210    /*
2211     * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2212     */
2213    if (col >= oldlen)
2214	return FAIL;
2215
2216#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2217    /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2218     * delete the last combining character. */
2219    if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2220					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
2221    {
2222	int	cc[MAX_MCO];
2223	int	n;
2224
2225	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc);
2226	if (cc[0] != NUL)
2227	{
2228	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2229	    n = col;
2230	    do
2231	    {
2232		col = n;
2233		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
2234		n += count;
2235	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2236	    fixpos = 0;
2237	}
2238    }
2239#endif
2240
2241    /*
2242     * When count is too big, reduce it.
2243     */
2244    movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2245    if (movelen <= 1)
2246    {
2247	/*
2248	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2249	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL,
2250	 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore".
2251	 */
2252	if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0
2253#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2254					      && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0
2255#endif
2256					      )
2257	{
2258	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2259#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2260	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2261#endif
2262#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2263	    if (has_mbyte)
2264		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2265			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2266#endif
2267	}
2268	count = oldlen - col;
2269	movelen = 1;
2270    }
2271
2272    /*
2273     * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2274     * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2275     * Can't do this when using Netbeans, because we would need to invoke
2276     * netbeans_removed(), which deallocates the line.  Let ml_replace() take
2277     * care of notifying Netbeans.
2278     */
2279#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2280    if (netbeans_active())
2281	was_alloced = FALSE;
2282    else
2283#endif
2284	was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2285    if (was_alloced)
2286	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2287    else
2288    {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2289	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2290	if (newp == NULL)
2291	    return FAIL;
2292	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2293    }
2294    mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2295    if (!was_alloced)
2296	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2297
2298    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2299    changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2300
2301    return OK;
2302}
2303
2304/*
2305 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2306 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2307 *
2308 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2309 */
2310    int
2311truncate_line(fixpos)
2312    int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2313{
2314    char_u	*newp;
2315    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2316    colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2317
2318    if (col == 0)
2319	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2320    else
2321	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2322
2323    if (newp == NULL)
2324	return FAIL;
2325
2326    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2327
2328    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2329    changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2330
2331    /*
2332     * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2333     */
2334    if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2335	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2336
2337    return OK;
2338}
2339
2340/*
2341 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2342 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2343 */
2344    void
2345del_lines(nlines, undo)
2346    long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2347    int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2348{
2349    long	n;
2350    linenr_T	first = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2351
2352    if (nlines <= 0)
2353	return;
2354
2355    /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2356    if (undo && u_savedel(first, nlines) == FAIL)
2357	return;
2358
2359    for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2360    {
2361	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2362	    break;
2363
2364	ml_delete(first, TRUE);
2365	++n;
2366
2367	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2368	if (first > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2369	    break;
2370    }
2371
2372    /* Correct the cursor position before calling deleted_lines_mark(), it may
2373     * trigger a callback to display the cursor. */
2374    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2375    check_cursor_lnum();
2376
2377    /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2378    deleted_lines_mark(first, n);
2379}
2380
2381    int
2382gchar_pos(pos)
2383    pos_T *pos;
2384{
2385    char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2386
2387#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2388    if (has_mbyte)
2389	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2390#endif
2391    return (int)*ptr;
2392}
2393
2394    int
2395gchar_cursor()
2396{
2397#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2398    if (has_mbyte)
2399	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2400#endif
2401    return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2402}
2403
2404/*
2405 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2406 * It is directly written into the block.
2407 */
2408    void
2409pchar_cursor(c)
2410    int c;
2411{
2412    *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2413						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2414}
2415
2416/*
2417 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2418 *		    non-blank in the line.
2419 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2420 *		    the line.
2421 */
2422    int
2423inindent(extra)
2424    int	    extra;
2425{
2426    char_u	*ptr;
2427    colnr_T	col;
2428
2429    for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2430	++ptr;
2431    if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2432	return TRUE;
2433    else
2434	return FALSE;
2435}
2436
2437/*
2438 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2439 */
2440    char_u *
2441skip_to_option_part(p)
2442    char_u  *p;
2443{
2444    if (*p == ',')
2445	++p;
2446    while (*p == ' ')
2447	++p;
2448    return p;
2449}
2450
2451/*
2452 * Call this function when something in the current buffer is changed.
2453 *
2454 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2455 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2456 *
2457 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
2458 */
2459    void
2460changed()
2461{
2462#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2463    /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2464     * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2465     * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2466    if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2467	return;
2468    xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2469#endif
2470
2471    if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2472    {
2473	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2474
2475	/* Give a warning about changing a read-only file.  This may also
2476	 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */
2477	change_warning(0);
2478
2479	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2480	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2481	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2482#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2483		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2484#endif
2485		)
2486	{
2487	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2488
2489	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2490	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2491	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2492	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2493	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2494	    {
2495		out_flush();
2496		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2497		wait_return(TRUE);
2498		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2499	    }
2500	}
2501	changed_int();
2502    }
2503    ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2504}
2505
2506/*
2507 * Internal part of changed(), no user interaction.
2508 */
2509    void
2510changed_int()
2511{
2512    curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2513    ml_setflags(curbuf);
2514#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2515    check_status(curbuf);
2516    redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2517#endif
2518#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2519    need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2520#endif
2521}
2522
2523static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2524static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2525static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2526
2527/*
2528 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2529 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2530 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2531 * - invalidates cached values
2532 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
2533 */
2534    void
2535changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2536    linenr_T	lnum;
2537    colnr_T	col;
2538{
2539    changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
2540    changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2541
2542#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2543    /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2544    if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2545    {
2546	win_T	    *wp;
2547	linenr_T    wlnum;
2548
2549	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2550	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2551	    {
2552		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2553		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2554		if (wlnum > 0)
2555		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2556	    }
2557    }
2558#endif
2559}
2560
2561    static void
2562changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2563    buf_T	*buf;
2564    linenr_T	lnum;
2565{
2566    if (buf->b_mod_set)
2567    {
2568	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2569	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2570	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2571	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2572	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2573    }
2574    else
2575    {
2576	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2577	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2578	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2579	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2580	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2581    }
2582}
2583
2584/*
2585 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2586 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2587 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2588 */
2589    void
2590appended_lines(lnum, count)
2591    linenr_T	lnum;
2592    long	count;
2593{
2594    changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2595}
2596
2597/*
2598 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2599 */
2600    void
2601appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2602    linenr_T	lnum;
2603    long	count;
2604{
2605    mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2606    changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2607}
2608
2609/*
2610 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2611 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2612 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2613 */
2614    void
2615deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2616    linenr_T	lnum;
2617    long	count;
2618{
2619    changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2620}
2621
2622/*
2623 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2624 * Make sure the cursor is on a valid line before calling, a GUI callback may
2625 * be triggered to display the cursor.
2626 */
2627    void
2628deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2629    linenr_T	lnum;
2630    long	count;
2631{
2632    mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2633    changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2634}
2635
2636/*
2637 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2638 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2639 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2640 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2641 * - invalidate cached values
2642 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2643 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2644 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2645 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2646 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
2647 */
2648    void
2649changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2650    linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2651    colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2652    linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2653    long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2654{
2655    changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2656
2657#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2658    if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2659    {
2660	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2661	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2662	 * displaying. */
2663	win_T	    *wp;
2664	linenr_T    wlnum;
2665
2666	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2667	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2668	    {
2669		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2670		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2671		if (wlnum > 0)
2672		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2673						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2674	    }
2675    }
2676#endif
2677
2678    changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2679}
2680
2681    static void
2682changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2683    buf_T	*buf;
2684    linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2685    linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2686    long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2687{
2688    if (buf->b_mod_set)
2689    {
2690	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2691	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2692	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2693	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
2694	{
2695	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2696	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2697	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2698		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2699	}
2700	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2701	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2702	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2703    }
2704    else
2705    {
2706	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2707	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2708	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2709	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2710	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2711    }
2712}
2713
2714/*
2715 * Common code for when a change is was made.
2716 * See changed_lines() for the arguments.
2717 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
2718 */
2719    static void
2720changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2721    linenr_T	lnum;
2722    colnr_T	col;
2723    linenr_T	lnume;
2724    long	xtra;
2725{
2726    win_T	*wp;
2727#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2728    tabpage_T	*tp;
2729#endif
2730    int		i;
2731#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2732    int		cols;
2733    pos_T	*p;
2734    int		add;
2735#endif
2736
2737    /* mark the buffer as modified */
2738    changed();
2739
2740    /* set the '. mark */
2741    if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2742    {
2743	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2744	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2745
2746#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2747	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2748	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2749	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2750	{
2751	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2752		add = TRUE;
2753	    else
2754	    {
2755		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2756		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2757		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2758		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2759		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2760		    add = TRUE;
2761		else
2762		{
2763		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2764		    if (cols == 0)
2765			cols = 79;
2766		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2767		}
2768	    }
2769	    if (add)
2770	    {
2771		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2772		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2773		 * position in the changelist. */
2774		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2775
2776		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2777		{
2778		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2779		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2780		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2781					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2782		    FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2783		    {
2784			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2785			 * this buffer. */
2786			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2787			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2788		    }
2789		}
2790		FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2791		{
2792		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2793		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2794		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2795			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2796			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2797		}
2798		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2799	    }
2800	}
2801	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2802							curbuf->b_last_change;
2803	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2804	 * takes you back to it. */
2805	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2806#endif
2807    }
2808
2809    FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2810    {
2811	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2812	{
2813	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2814	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2815		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2816
2817	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2818	     * values for the cursor. */
2819#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2820	    /*
2821	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2822	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2823	     */
2824	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2825
2826	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2827	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2828	     * might be displayed differently.
2829	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2830	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2831	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2832	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2833		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2834	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2835	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2836		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2837
2838	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2839	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2840	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2841	    {
2842		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2843		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2844		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2845	    }
2846#endif
2847
2848	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2849		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2850	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2851		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2852	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2853	    {
2854		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2855		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2856		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2857	    }
2858
2859	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2860	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2861	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2862	     * after the change. */
2863	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2864		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2865		{
2866		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2867		    {
2868			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2869			{
2870			    /* line included in change */
2871			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2872			}
2873			else if (xtra != 0)
2874			{
2875			    /* line below change */
2876			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2877#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2878			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2879#endif
2880			}
2881		    }
2882#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2883		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2884		    {
2885			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2886			 * may need to be redrawn */
2887			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2888		    }
2889#endif
2890		}
2891
2892#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2893	    /* Take care of side effects for setting w_topline when folds have
2894	     * changed.  Esp. when the buffer was changed in another window. */
2895	    if (hasAnyFolding(wp))
2896		set_topline(wp, wp->w_topline);
2897#endif
2898	}
2899    }
2900
2901    /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2902     * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2903    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2904	must_redraw = VALID;
2905
2906#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2907    /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */
2908    if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum
2909		 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
2910	last_cursormoved.lnum = 0;
2911#endif
2912}
2913
2914/*
2915 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2916 */
2917    void
2918unchanged(buf, ff)
2919    buf_T	*buf;
2920    int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2921{
2922    if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2923    {
2924	buf->b_changed = 0;
2925	ml_setflags(buf);
2926	if (ff)
2927	    save_file_ff(buf);
2928#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2929	check_status(buf);
2930	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2931#endif
2932#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2933	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2934#endif
2935    }
2936    ++buf->b_changedtick;
2937#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2938    netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2939#endif
2940}
2941
2942#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2943/*
2944 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2945 *		 need to be updated
2946 */
2947    void
2948check_status(buf)
2949    buf_T	*buf;
2950{
2951    win_T	*wp;
2952
2953    for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2954	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2955	{
2956	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2957	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2958		must_redraw = VALID;
2959	}
2960}
2961#endif
2962
2963/*
2964 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2965 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2966 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2967 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
2968 * will be TRUE.
2969 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
2970 */
2971    void
2972change_warning(col)
2973    int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2974				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2975{
2976    static char *w_readonly = N_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file");
2977
2978    if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2979	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2980#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2981	    && !autocmd_busy
2982#endif
2983	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2984    {
2985#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2986	++curbuf_lock;
2987	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2988	--curbuf_lock;
2989	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2990	    return;
2991#endif
2992	/*
2993	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2994	 * be after the mode message.
2995	 */
2996	msg_start();
2997	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2998	    msg_col = col;
2999	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3000	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_(w_readonly), hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
3001#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
3002	set_vim_var_string(VV_WARNINGMSG, (char_u *)_(w_readonly), -1);
3003#endif
3004	msg_clr_eos();
3005	(void)msg_end();
3006	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
3007	{
3008	    out_flush();
3009	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
3010	}
3011	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
3012	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
3013	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
3014	    showmode();
3015    }
3016}
3017
3018/*
3019 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
3020 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
3021 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
3022 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
3023 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
3024 *
3025 * return the 'y' or 'n'
3026 */
3027    int
3028ask_yesno(str, direct)
3029    char_u  *str;
3030    int	    direct;
3031{
3032    int	    r = ' ';
3033    int	    save_State = State;
3034
3035    if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
3036	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
3037    ++no_wait_return;
3038#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3039    dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3040#endif
3041    State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
3042#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3043    setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
3044#endif
3045    ++no_mapping;
3046    ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3047
3048    while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
3049    {
3050	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
3051	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
3052	if (direct)
3053	    r = get_keystroke();
3054	else
3055	    r = plain_vgetc();
3056	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
3057	    r = 'n';
3058	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
3059	out_flush();
3060    }
3061    --no_wait_return;
3062    State = save_State;
3063#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3064    setmouse();
3065#endif
3066    --no_mapping;
3067    --allow_keys;
3068
3069    return r;
3070}
3071
3072/*
3073 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
3074 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
3075 * button (used at the more prompt).
3076 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
3077 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
3078 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
3079 */
3080    int
3081get_keystroke()
3082{
3083#define CBUFLEN 151
3084    char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
3085    int		len = 0;
3086    int		n;
3087    int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3088    int		waited = 0;
3089
3090    mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
3091    for (;;)
3092    {
3093	cursor_on();
3094	out_flush();
3095
3096	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3097	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3098	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
3099	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3100	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3101						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3102	if (n > 0)
3103	{
3104	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3105	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3106	    len += n;
3107	    waited = 0;
3108	}
3109	else if (len > 0)
3110	    ++waited;	    /* keep track of the waiting time */
3111
3112	/* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */
3113	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0
3114	       && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm)))
3115	    continue;
3116
3117	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
3118	if (n > 0)
3119	    len = n;
3120	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
3121	    continue;
3122
3123	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3124	n = buf[0];
3125	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3126	{
3127	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3128	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3129		    || n == K_IGNORE
3130#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3131		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3132		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3133		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3134		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3135		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3136		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3137		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3138		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3139		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3140		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3141		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3142		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
3143		    || n == K_MOUSELEFT
3144		    || n == K_MOUSERIGHT
3145		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
3146		    || n == K_X1DRAG
3147		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
3148		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3149		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3150		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3151# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3152		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3153		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3154# endif
3155#endif
3156	       )
3157	    {
3158		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3159		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3160		len -= 3;
3161		if (len > 0)
3162		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3163		continue;
3164	    }
3165	    break;
3166	}
3167#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3168	if (has_mbyte)
3169	{
3170	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3171		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3172	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3173	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3174	}
3175#endif
3176#ifdef UNIX
3177	if (n == intr_char)
3178	    n = ESC;
3179#endif
3180	break;
3181    }
3182
3183    mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3184    return n;
3185}
3186
3187/*
3188 * Get a number from the user.
3189 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
3190 */
3191    int
3192get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3193    int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3194    int	    *mouse_used;
3195{
3196    int	n = 0;
3197    int	c;
3198    int typed = 0;
3199
3200    if (mouse_used != NULL)
3201	*mouse_used = FALSE;
3202
3203    /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3204     * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3205    if (msg_silent != 0)
3206	return 0;
3207
3208#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3209    dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3210#endif
3211    ++no_mapping;
3212    ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3213    for (;;)
3214    {
3215	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3216	c = safe_vgetc();
3217	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3218	{
3219	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3220	    msg_putchar(c);
3221	    ++typed;
3222	}
3223	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3224	{
3225	    if (typed > 0)
3226	    {
3227		MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3228		--typed;
3229	    }
3230	    n /= 10;
3231	}
3232#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3233	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3234	{
3235	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
3236	    n = mouse_row + 1;
3237	    break;
3238	}
3239#endif
3240	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3241	{
3242	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3243	    if (!exmode_active)
3244		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3245	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3246	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3247	    break;
3248	}
3249	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3250	    break;
3251    }
3252    --no_mapping;
3253    --allow_keys;
3254    return n;
3255}
3256
3257/*
3258 * Ask the user to enter a number.
3259 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3260 * the line number.
3261 */
3262    int
3263prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3264    int		*mouse_used;
3265{
3266    int		i;
3267    int		save_cmdline_row;
3268    int		save_State;
3269
3270    /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3271    if (mouse_used != NULL)
3272	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> or click with mouse (empty cancels): "));
3273    else
3274	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> (empty cancels): "));
3275
3276    /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still
3277     * get mouse events. */
3278    save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3279    cmdline_row = 0;
3280    save_State = State;
3281    State = CMDLINE;
3282
3283    i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3284    if (KeyTyped)
3285    {
3286	/* don't call wait_return() now */
3287	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
3288	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3289	need_wait_return = FALSE;
3290	msg_didany = FALSE;
3291	msg_didout = FALSE;
3292    }
3293    else
3294	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3295    State = save_State;
3296
3297    return i;
3298}
3299
3300    void
3301msgmore(n)
3302    long n;
3303{
3304    long pn;
3305
3306    if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3307	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3308	return;
3309
3310    /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3311     * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3312     * then "put" reports the last action. */
3313    if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3314	return;
3315
3316    if (n > 0)
3317	pn = n;
3318    else
3319	pn = -n;
3320
3321    if (pn > p_report)
3322    {
3323	if (pn == 1)
3324	{
3325	    if (n > 0)
3326		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3327	    else
3328		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3329	}
3330	else
3331	{
3332	    if (n > 0)
3333		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3334	    else
3335		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3336	}
3337	if (got_int)
3338	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3339	if (msg(msg_buf))
3340	{
3341	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0);
3342	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
3343	}
3344    }
3345}
3346
3347/*
3348 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3349 */
3350    void
3351beep_flush()
3352{
3353    if (emsg_silent == 0)
3354    {
3355	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3356	vim_beep();
3357    }
3358}
3359
3360/*
3361 * give a warning for an error
3362 */
3363    void
3364vim_beep()
3365{
3366    if (emsg_silent == 0)
3367    {
3368	if (p_vb
3369#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3370		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3371		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3372		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3373#endif
3374		)
3375	{
3376	    out_str(T_VB);
3377	}
3378	else
3379	{
3380#ifdef MSDOS
3381	    /*
3382	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3383	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3384	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3385	     */
3386	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3387	    {
3388		out_char(BELL);
3389		beep_count = 1;
3390	    }
3391	    else
3392		++beep_count;
3393#else
3394	    out_char(BELL);
3395#endif
3396	}
3397
3398	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3399	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3400	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3401	{
3402	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3403	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3404	}
3405    }
3406}
3407
3408/*
3409 * To get the "real" home directory:
3410 * - get value of $HOME
3411 * For Unix:
3412 *  - go to that directory
3413 *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3414 *  This also works with mounts and links.
3415 *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3416 */
3417static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3418
3419    void
3420init_homedir()
3421{
3422    char_u  *var;
3423
3424    /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3425    vim_free(homedir);
3426    homedir = NULL;
3427
3428#ifdef VMS
3429    var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3430#else
3431    var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3432#endif
3433
3434    if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3435	var = NULL;
3436
3437#ifdef WIN3264
3438    /*
3439     * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3440     * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3441     * when $HOME is being set.
3442     */
3443    if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3444    {
3445	char_u	*p;
3446	char_u	*exp;
3447
3448	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3449	if (p != NULL)
3450	{
3451	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3452	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3453	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3454					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3455	    {
3456		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3457		var = NameBuff;
3458		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3459		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3460	    }
3461	}
3462    }
3463
3464    /*
3465     * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3466     * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3467     * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3468     * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3469     */
3470    if (var == NULL)
3471    {
3472	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3473
3474	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3475	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3476	if (homepath == NULL || *homepath == NUL)
3477	    homepath = "\\";
3478	if (homedrive != NULL
3479			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3480	{
3481	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3482	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3483	    {
3484		var = NameBuff;
3485		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3486		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3487	    }
3488	}
3489    }
3490
3491# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3492    if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3493    {
3494	int	len;
3495	char_u  *pp;
3496
3497	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3498	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3499	acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3500	if (pp != NULL)
3501	{
3502	    homedir = pp;
3503	    return;
3504	}
3505    }
3506# endif
3507#endif
3508
3509#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3510    /*
3511     * Default home dir is C:/
3512     * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3513     */
3514    if (var == NULL)
3515	var = "C:/";
3516#endif
3517    if (var != NULL)
3518    {
3519#ifdef UNIX
3520	/*
3521	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3522	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3523	 */
3524	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3525					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3526	{
3527	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3528		var = IObuff;
3529	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3530		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3531	}
3532#endif
3533	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3534    }
3535}
3536
3537#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3538    void
3539free_homedir()
3540{
3541    vim_free(homedir);
3542}
3543#endif
3544
3545/*
3546 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3547 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3548 * again soon.
3549 */
3550    char_u *
3551expand_env_save(src)
3552    char_u	*src;
3553{
3554    return expand_env_save_opt(src, FALSE);
3555}
3556
3557/*
3558 * Idem, but when "one" is TRUE handle the string as one file name, only
3559 * expand "~" at the start.
3560 */
3561    char_u *
3562expand_env_save_opt(src, one)
3563    char_u	*src;
3564    int		one;
3565{
3566    char_u	*p;
3567
3568    p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3569    if (p != NULL)
3570	expand_env_esc(src, p, MAXPATHL, FALSE, one, NULL);
3571    return p;
3572}
3573
3574/*
3575 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3576 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3577 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$" (not for Win32 though).
3578 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3579 */
3580    void
3581expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3582    char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3583    char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3584    int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3585{
3586    expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, FALSE, NULL);
3587}
3588
3589    void
3590expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, one, startstr)
3591    char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3592    char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3593    int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3594    int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3595    int		one;		/* "srcp" is one file name */
3596    char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
3597{
3598    char_u	*src;
3599    char_u	*tail;
3600    int		c;
3601    char_u	*var;
3602    int		copy_char;
3603    int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3604    int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3605    int		startstr_len = 0;
3606
3607    if (startstr != NULL)
3608	startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr);
3609
3610    src = skipwhite(srcp);
3611    --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3612    while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3613    {
3614	copy_char = TRUE;
3615	if ((*src == '$'
3616#ifdef VMS
3617		    && at_start
3618#endif
3619	   )
3620#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3621		|| *src == '%'
3622#endif
3623		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3624	{
3625	    mustfree = FALSE;
3626
3627	    /*
3628	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3629	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3630	     */
3631	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3632	    {
3633		tail = src + 1;
3634		var = dst;
3635		c = dstlen - 1;
3636
3637#ifdef UNIX
3638		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3639		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3640		{
3641		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3642		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3643			*var++ = *tail++;
3644		}
3645		else
3646#endif
3647		{
3648		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3649#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3650			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3651#endif
3652			    ))
3653		    {
3654#ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3655			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3656			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3657#else
3658			*var++ = *tail++;
3659#endif
3660		    }
3661		}
3662
3663#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3664# ifdef UNIX
3665		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3666# else
3667		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3668# endif
3669		    var = NULL;
3670		else
3671		{
3672# ifdef UNIX
3673		    if (src[1] == '{')
3674# else
3675		    if (*src == '%')
3676#endif
3677			++tail;
3678#endif
3679		    *var = NUL;
3680		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3681#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3682		}
3683#endif
3684	    }
3685							/* home directory */
3686	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3687		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3688		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3689	    {
3690		var = homedir;
3691		tail = src + 1;
3692	    }
3693	    else					/* user directory */
3694	    {
3695#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3696		/*
3697		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3698		 */
3699		tail = src;
3700		var = dst;
3701		c = dstlen - 1;
3702		while (	   c-- > 0
3703			&& *tail
3704			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3705			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3706		    *var++ = *tail++;
3707		*var = NUL;
3708# ifdef UNIX
3709		/*
3710		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3711		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3712		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3713		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3714		 */
3715#  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3716		{
3717		    struct passwd *pw;
3718
3719		    /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
3720		     * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
3721		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3722		    if (pw != NULL)
3723			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3724		    else
3725			var = NULL;
3726		}
3727		if (var == NULL)
3728#  endif
3729		{
3730		    expand_T	xpc;
3731
3732		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3733		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3734		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3735				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3736		    mustfree = TRUE;
3737		}
3738
3739# else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3740		/*
3741		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3742		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3743		 */
3744		{
3745		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3746		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3747		    struct stat	st;
3748
3749		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3750		    next_path = paths;
3751		    while (*next_path)
3752		    {
3753			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3754				next_path++);
3755			if (*next_path)
3756			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3757			STRCPY(test, path);
3758			STRCAT(test, "/");
3759			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3760			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3761			{
3762			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3763			    STRCPY(var, test);
3764			    mustfree = TRUE;
3765			    break;
3766			}
3767		    }
3768		}
3769# endif /* UNIX */
3770#else
3771		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3772		var = NULL;
3773		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3774#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3775	    }
3776
3777#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3778	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3779	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3780	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3781	    {
3782		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3783
3784		if (p != NULL)
3785		{
3786		    if (mustfree)
3787			vim_free(var);
3788		    var = p;
3789		    mustfree = TRUE;
3790		    forward_slash(var);
3791		}
3792	    }
3793#endif
3794
3795	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3796	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3797	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3798	    {
3799		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3800
3801		if (p != NULL)
3802		{
3803		    if (mustfree)
3804			vim_free(var);
3805		    var = p;
3806		    mustfree = TRUE;
3807		}
3808	    }
3809
3810	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3811		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3812	    {
3813		STRCPY(dst, var);
3814		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3815		c = (int)STRLEN(var);
3816		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3817		 * with it, skip a character */
3818		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
3819#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3820			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3821#endif
3822			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3823		    ++tail;
3824		dst += c;
3825		src = tail;
3826		copy_char = FALSE;
3827	    }
3828	    if (mustfree)
3829		vim_free(var);
3830	}
3831
3832	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3833	{
3834	    /*
3835	     * Recognize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3836	     * Don't do this when "one" is TRUE, to avoid expanding "~" in
3837	     * ":edit foo ~ foo".
3838	     */
3839	    at_start = FALSE;
3840	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3841	    {
3842		*dst++ = *src++;
3843		--dstlen;
3844	    }
3845	    else if ((src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') && !one)
3846		at_start = TRUE;
3847	    *dst++ = *src++;
3848	    --dstlen;
3849
3850	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3851		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3852		at_start = TRUE;
3853	}
3854    }
3855    *dst = NUL;
3856}
3857
3858/*
3859 * Vim's version of getenv().
3860 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3861 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
3862 */
3863    char_u *
3864vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3865    char_u	*name;
3866    int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3867{
3868    char_u	*p;
3869    char_u	*pend;
3870    int		vimruntime;
3871
3872#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3873    /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3874    if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3875	return homedir;
3876#endif
3877
3878    p = mch_getenv(name);
3879    if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3880	p = NULL;
3881
3882    if (p != NULL)
3883    {
3884#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3885	if (enc_utf8)
3886	{
3887	    int	    len;
3888	    char_u  *pp;
3889
3890	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3891	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3892	    acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3893	    if (pp != NULL)
3894	    {
3895		p = pp;
3896		*mustfree = TRUE;
3897	    }
3898	}
3899#endif
3900	return p;
3901    }
3902
3903    vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3904    if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3905	return NULL;
3906
3907    /*
3908     * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3909     * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3910     */
3911    if (vimruntime
3912#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3913	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3914#endif
3915       )
3916    {
3917	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3918	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3919	    p = NULL;
3920	if (p != NULL)
3921	{
3922	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3923	    if (p != NULL)
3924		*mustfree = TRUE;
3925	    else
3926		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3927
3928#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3929	    if (enc_utf8)
3930	    {
3931		int	len;
3932		char_u  *pp;
3933
3934		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
3935		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3936		 * characters. */
3937		acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3938		if (pp != NULL)
3939		{
3940		    if (mustfree)
3941			vim_free(p);
3942		    p = pp;
3943		    *mustfree = TRUE;
3944		}
3945	    }
3946#endif
3947	}
3948    }
3949
3950    /*
3951     * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3952     * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3953     * - the executable name from argv[0]
3954     */
3955    if (p == NULL)
3956    {
3957	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3958	    p = p_hf;
3959#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3960	/*
3961	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3962	 */
3963	else
3964	    p = exe_name;
3965#endif
3966	if (p != NULL)
3967	{
3968	    /* remove the file name */
3969	    pend = gettail(p);
3970
3971	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3972	    if (p == p_hf)
3973		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3974
3975#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3976# ifdef MACOS_X
3977	    /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */
3978	    if (p == exe_name)
3979	    {
3980		char_u	*pend1;
3981		char_u	*pnew;
3982
3983		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS");
3984		if (pend1 != pend)
3985		{
3986		    pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15);
3987		    if (pnew != NULL)
3988		    {
3989			STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p));
3990			STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim");
3991			p = pnew;
3992			pend = p + STRLEN(p);
3993		    }
3994		}
3995	    }
3996# endif
3997	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3998	    if (p == exe_name)
3999		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
4000#endif
4001
4002	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
4003	    if (!vimruntime)
4004	    {
4005		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
4006		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
4007	    }
4008
4009	    /* remove trailing path separator */
4010#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
4011	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
4012	    /* to avoid confusion between absolute and relative path */
4013	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
4014		--pend;
4015#endif
4016
4017#ifdef MACOS_X
4018	    if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf)
4019#endif
4020		/* check that the result is a directory name */
4021		p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
4022
4023	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
4024	    {
4025		vim_free(p);
4026		p = NULL;
4027	    }
4028	    else
4029	    {
4030#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
4031		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
4032		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
4033		{
4034		    vim_free(p);
4035		    p = pend;
4036		}
4037#endif
4038		*mustfree = TRUE;
4039	    }
4040	}
4041    }
4042
4043#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
4044    /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
4045     * default_vimruntime_dir */
4046    if (p == NULL)
4047    {
4048	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
4049	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
4050	{
4051	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
4052	    *mustfree = FALSE;
4053	}
4054	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
4055	{
4056	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
4057		*mustfree = TRUE;
4058	    else
4059	    {
4060		p = default_vim_dir;
4061		*mustfree = FALSE;
4062	    }
4063	}
4064    }
4065#endif
4066
4067    /*
4068     * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
4069     * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
4070     */
4071    if (p != NULL)
4072    {
4073	if (vimruntime)
4074	{
4075	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
4076	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
4077#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
4078	    {
4079		char_u	*buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
4080
4081		if (buf != NULL)
4082		{
4083		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
4084		    vim_free(buf);
4085		}
4086	    }
4087#endif
4088	}
4089	else
4090	{
4091	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
4092	    didset_vim = TRUE;
4093	}
4094    }
4095    return p;
4096}
4097
4098/*
4099 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
4100 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
4101 */
4102    static char_u *
4103vim_version_dir(vimdir)
4104    char_u	*vimdir;
4105{
4106    char_u	*p;
4107
4108    if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
4109	return NULL;
4110    p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
4111    if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4112	return p;
4113    vim_free(p);
4114    p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
4115    if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4116	return p;
4117    vim_free(p);
4118    return NULL;
4119}
4120
4121/*
4122 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
4123 * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
4124 */
4125    static char_u *
4126remove_tail(p, pend, name)
4127    char_u	*p;
4128    char_u	*pend;
4129    char_u	*name;
4130{
4131    int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
4132    char_u	*newend = pend - len;
4133
4134    if (newend >= p
4135	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
4136	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
4137	return newend;
4138    return pend;
4139}
4140
4141/*
4142 * Our portable version of setenv.
4143 */
4144    void
4145vim_setenv(name, val)
4146    char_u	*name;
4147    char_u	*val;
4148{
4149#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4150    mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4151#else
4152    char_u	*envbuf;
4153
4154    /*
4155     * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4156     * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
4157     */
4158    envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4159    if (envbuf != NULL)
4160    {
4161	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4162	putenv((char *)envbuf);
4163    }
4164#endif
4165}
4166
4167#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4168/*
4169 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4170 */
4171    char_u *
4172get_env_name(xp, idx)
4173    expand_T	*xp UNUSED;
4174    int		idx;
4175{
4176# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4177    /*
4178     * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4179     */
4180    return NULL;
4181# else
4182# ifndef __WIN32__
4183    /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4184    extern char		**environ;
4185# endif
4186# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4187    static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
4188    char_u		*str;
4189    int			n;
4190
4191    str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4192    if (str == NULL)
4193	return NULL;
4194
4195    for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
4196    {
4197	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4198	    break;
4199	name[n] = str[n];
4200    }
4201    name[n] = NUL;
4202    return name;
4203# endif
4204}
4205#endif
4206
4207/*
4208 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4209 * 'src'.
4210 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4211 */
4212    void
4213home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4214    buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4215    char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4216    char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
4217    int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
4218    int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4219			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
4220{
4221    size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4222    size_t	len;
4223    char_u	*homedir_env;
4224    char_u	*p;
4225
4226    if (src == NULL)
4227    {
4228	*dst = NUL;
4229	return;
4230    }
4231
4232    /*
4233     * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4234     */
4235    if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4236    {
4237	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4238	return;
4239    }
4240
4241    /*
4242     * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4243     * "real" home directory.
4244     */
4245    if (homedir != NULL)
4246	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4247
4248#ifdef VMS
4249    homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4250#else
4251    homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4252#endif
4253
4254    if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4255	homedir_env = NULL;
4256    if (homedir_env != NULL)
4257	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4258
4259    if (!one)
4260	src = skipwhite(src);
4261    while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4262    {
4263	/*
4264	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4265	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4266	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4267	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4268	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4269	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4270	 * er's home directory)).
4271	 */
4272	p = homedir;
4273	len = dirlen;
4274	for (;;)
4275	{
4276	    if (   len
4277		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4278		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4279		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4280		    || src[len] == NUL))
4281	    {
4282		src += len;
4283		if (--dstlen > 0)
4284		    *dst++ = '~';
4285
4286		/*
4287		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
4288		 */
4289		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4290		    *dst++ = '/';
4291		break;
4292	    }
4293	    if (p == homedir_env)
4294		break;
4295	    p = homedir_env;
4296	    len = envlen;
4297	}
4298
4299	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4300	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4301	    *dst++ = *src++;
4302	/* skip separator */
4303	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4304	    *dst++ = *src++;
4305    }
4306    /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4307
4308    *dst = NUL;
4309}
4310
4311/*
4312 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4313 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4314 */
4315    char_u  *
4316home_replace_save(buf, src)
4317    buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4318    char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4319{
4320    char_u	*dst;
4321    unsigned	len;
4322
4323    len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4324    if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4325	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4326    dst = alloc(len);
4327    if (dst != NULL)
4328	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4329    return dst;
4330}
4331
4332/*
4333 * Compare two file names and return:
4334 * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4335 * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4336 * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4337 * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4338 * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4339 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4340 */
4341    int
4342fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4343    char_u *s1, *s2;
4344    int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4345{
4346#ifdef UNIX
4347    char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4348    char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4349    char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4350    struct stat	    st1, st2;
4351    int		    r1, r2;
4352
4353    expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4354    r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4355    r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4356    if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4357    {
4358	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4359	if (checkname)
4360	{
4361	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4362		return FPC_SAMEX;
4363	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4364	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4365	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4366		return FPC_SAMEX;
4367	}
4368	return FPC_NOTX;
4369    }
4370    if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4371	return FPC_DIFFX;
4372    if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4373	return FPC_SAME;
4374    return FPC_DIFF;
4375#else
4376    char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4377    char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4378    char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4379    int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4380    int	    r1, r2;
4381
4382    /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4383    if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4384    {
4385	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4386	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4387
4388	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4389	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4390	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4391
4392	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4393	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4394	{
4395	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4396		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4397	    else
4398		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4399	}
4400	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4401	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4402	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4403	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4404	else
4405	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4406	vim_free(exp1);
4407    }
4408    return retval;
4409#endif
4410}
4411
4412/*
4413 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4414 * When the path ends in a path separator the tail is the NUL after it.
4415 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4416 */
4417    char_u *
4418gettail(fname)
4419    char_u *fname;
4420{
4421    char_u  *p1, *p2;
4422
4423    if (fname == NULL)
4424	return (char_u *)"";
4425    for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4426    {
4427	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4428	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4429	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
4430    }
4431    return p1;
4432}
4433
4434#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
4435static char_u *gettail_dir __ARGS((char_u *fname));
4436
4437/*
4438 * Return the end of the directory name, on the first path
4439 * separator:
4440 * "/path/file", "/path/dir/", "/path//dir", "/file"
4441 *	 ^	       ^	     ^	      ^
4442 */
4443    static char_u *
4444gettail_dir(fname)
4445    char_u *fname;
4446{
4447    char_u	*dir_end = fname;
4448    char_u	*next_dir_end = fname;
4449    int		look_for_sep = TRUE;
4450    char_u	*p;
4451
4452    for (p = fname; *p != NUL; )
4453    {
4454	if (vim_ispathsep(*p))
4455	{
4456	    if (look_for_sep)
4457	    {
4458		next_dir_end = p;
4459		look_for_sep = FALSE;
4460	    }
4461	}
4462	else
4463	{
4464	    if (!look_for_sep)
4465		dir_end = next_dir_end;
4466	    look_for_sep = TRUE;
4467	}
4468	mb_ptr_adv(p);
4469    }
4470    return dir_end;
4471}
4472#endif
4473
4474/*
4475 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
4476 * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4477 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4478 */
4479    char_u *
4480gettail_sep(fname)
4481    char_u	*fname;
4482{
4483    char_u	*p;
4484    char_u	*t;
4485
4486    p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4487    t = gettail(fname);
4488    while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4489	--t;
4490#ifdef VMS
4491    /* path separator is part of the path */
4492    ++t;
4493#endif
4494    return t;
4495}
4496
4497/*
4498 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4499 */
4500    char_u *
4501getnextcomp(fname)
4502    char_u *fname;
4503{
4504    while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4505	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
4506    if (*fname)
4507	++fname;
4508    return fname;
4509}
4510
4511/*
4512 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4513 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4514 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4515 */
4516    char_u *
4517get_past_head(path)
4518    char_u  *path;
4519{
4520    char_u  *retval;
4521
4522#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4523    /* may skip "c:" */
4524    if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4525	retval = path + 2;
4526    else
4527	retval = path;
4528#else
4529# if defined(AMIGA)
4530    /* may skip "label:" */
4531    retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4532    if (retval == NULL)
4533	retval = path;
4534# else	/* Unix */
4535    retval = path;
4536# endif
4537#endif
4538
4539    while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4540	++retval;
4541
4542    return retval;
4543}
4544
4545/*
4546 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4547 */
4548    int
4549vim_ispathsep(c)
4550    int c;
4551{
4552#ifdef RISCOS
4553    return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4554#else
4555# ifdef UNIX
4556    return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4557# else
4558#  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4559    return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4560#  else
4561#   ifdef VMS
4562    /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4563    return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4564	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4565#   else		/* Amiga */
4566    return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4567#   endif /* VMS */
4568#  endif
4569# endif
4570#endif /* RISC OS */
4571}
4572
4573#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4574/*
4575 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4576 */
4577    int
4578vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4579    int c;
4580{
4581#ifdef UNIX
4582    return (c == ':');
4583#else
4584    return (c == ';');	/* might not be right for every system... */
4585#endif
4586}
4587#endif
4588
4589#if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \
4590	|| defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
4591/*
4592 * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname"
4593 * It's done in-place.
4594 */
4595    void
4596shorten_dir(str)
4597    char_u *str;
4598{
4599    char_u	*tail, *s, *d;
4600    int		skip = FALSE;
4601
4602    tail = gettail(str);
4603    d = str;
4604    for (s = str; ; ++s)
4605    {
4606	if (s >= tail)		    /* copy the whole tail */
4607	{
4608	    *d++ = *s;
4609	    if (*s == NUL)
4610		break;
4611	}
4612	else if (vim_ispathsep(*s))	    /* copy '/' and next char */
4613	{
4614	    *d++ = *s;
4615	    skip = FALSE;
4616	}
4617	else if (!skip)
4618	{
4619	    *d++ = *s;		    /* copy next char */
4620	    if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */
4621		skip = TRUE;
4622# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4623	    if (has_mbyte)
4624	    {
4625		int l = mb_ptr2len(s);
4626
4627		while (--l > 0)
4628		    *d++ = *++s;
4629	    }
4630# endif
4631	}
4632    }
4633}
4634#endif
4635
4636/*
4637 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4638 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4639 * "fname" must be writable!.
4640 */
4641    int
4642dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4643    char_u	*fname;
4644{
4645    char_u	*p;
4646    int		c;
4647    int		retval;
4648
4649    p = gettail_sep(fname);
4650    if (p == fname)
4651	return TRUE;
4652    c = *p;
4653    *p = NUL;
4654    retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4655    *p = c;
4656    return retval;
4657}
4658
4659#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4660	|| defined(PROTO)
4661/*
4662 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4663 */
4664    int
4665vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4666    char_u	*x, *y;
4667{
4668    return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4669}
4670
4671    int
4672vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4673    char_u	*x, *y;
4674    size_t	len;
4675{
4676    while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4677    {
4678	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4679		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4680		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4681	    break;
4682	++x;
4683	++y;
4684	--len;
4685    }
4686    if (len == 0)
4687	return 0;
4688    return (*x - *y);
4689}
4690#endif
4691
4692/*
4693 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4694 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is necessary.
4695 */
4696    char_u  *
4697concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4698    char_u  *fname1;
4699    char_u  *fname2;
4700    int	    sep;
4701{
4702    char_u  *dest;
4703
4704    dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4705    if (dest != NULL)
4706    {
4707	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4708	if (sep)
4709	    add_pathsep(dest);
4710	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4711    }
4712    return dest;
4713}
4714
4715/*
4716 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4717 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4718 */
4719    char_u  *
4720concat_str(str1, str2)
4721    char_u  *str1;
4722    char_u  *str2;
4723{
4724    char_u  *dest;
4725    size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);
4726
4727    dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4728    if (dest != NULL)
4729    {
4730	STRCPY(dest, str1);
4731	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4732    }
4733    return dest;
4734}
4735
4736/*
4737 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4738 * separator.
4739 */
4740    void
4741add_pathsep(p)
4742    char_u	*p;
4743{
4744    if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
4745	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4746}
4747
4748/*
4749 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4750 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4751 */
4752    char_u  *
4753FullName_save(fname, force)
4754    char_u	*fname;
4755    int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4756			       like a full path name */
4757{
4758    char_u	*buf;
4759    char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4760
4761    if (fname == NULL)
4762	return NULL;
4763
4764    buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4765    if (buf != NULL)
4766    {
4767	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4768	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4769	else
4770	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4771	vim_free(buf);
4772    }
4773    return new_fname;
4774}
4775
4776#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4777
4778static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4779
4780/*
4781 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4782 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4783 */
4784    pos_T *
4785find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4786    int		ind_maxcomment;
4787{
4788    pos_T	*pos;
4789    char_u	*line;
4790    char_u	*p;
4791    int		cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment;
4792
4793    for (;;)
4794    {
4795	pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment);
4796	if (pos == NULL)
4797	    break;
4798
4799	/*
4800	 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4801	 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again.
4802	 */
4803	line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4804	for (p = line; *p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4805	    p = skip_string(p);
4806	if ((colnr_T)(p - line) <= pos->col)
4807	    break;
4808	cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1;
4809	if (cur_maxcomment <= 0)
4810	{
4811	    pos = NULL;
4812	    break;
4813	}
4814    }
4815    return pos;
4816}
4817
4818/*
4819 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4820 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4821 */
4822    static char_u *
4823skip_string(p)
4824    char_u  *p;
4825{
4826    int	    i;
4827
4828    /*
4829     * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4830     */
4831    for ( ; ; ++p)
4832    {
4833	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4834	{
4835	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4836		break;
4837	    i = 2;
4838	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4839	    {
4840		++i;
4841		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4842		    ++i;
4843	    }
4844	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4845	    {
4846		p += i;
4847		continue;
4848	    }
4849	}
4850	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4851	{
4852	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4853	    {
4854		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4855		    ++p;
4856		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4857		    break;
4858	    }
4859	    if (p[0] == '"')
4860		continue;
4861	}
4862	break;				    /* no string found */
4863    }
4864    if (!*p)
4865	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4866    return p;
4867}
4868#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4869
4870#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4871
4872/*
4873 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4874 */
4875    void
4876do_c_expr_indent()
4877{
4878# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4879    if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4880	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4881    else
4882# endif
4883	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4884}
4885
4886/*
4887 * Functions for C-indenting.
4888 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4889 */
4890/*
4891 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4892 */
4893
4894static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4895static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4896static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4897static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4898static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4899static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4900static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4901static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4902static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4903static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4904static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4905static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4906static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4907static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4908static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4909static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4910static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4911static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4912static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4913static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4914static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4915static int	cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int	ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4916static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4917static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((colnr_T *col));
4918static int	get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass));
4919static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4920static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4921static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4922static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4923static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4924static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4925static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4926
4927static int	ind_hash_comment = 0;   /* # starts a comment */
4928
4929/*
4930 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4931 * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired.
4932 */
4933    static char_u *
4934cin_skipcomment(s)
4935    char_u	*s;
4936{
4937    while (*s)
4938    {
4939	char_u *prev_s = s;
4940
4941	s = skipwhite(s);
4942
4943	/* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol.  Require a space
4944	 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */
4945	if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#')
4946	{
4947	    s += STRLEN(s);
4948	    break;
4949	}
4950	if (*s != '/')
4951	    break;
4952	++s;
4953	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4954	{
4955	    s += STRLEN(s);
4956	    break;
4957	}
4958	if (*s != '*')
4959	    break;
4960	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4961	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4962	    {
4963		s += 2;
4964		break;
4965	    }
4966    }
4967    return s;
4968}
4969
4970/*
4971 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4972 * not considered code.
4973 */
4974    static int
4975cin_nocode(s)
4976    char_u	*s;
4977{
4978    return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4979}
4980
4981/*
4982 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4983 */
4984    static pos_T *
4985find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4986{
4987    static pos_T pos;
4988    char_u	 *line;
4989    char_u	 *p;
4990
4991    pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4992    while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4993    {
4994	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4995	p = skipwhite(line);
4996	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4997	{
4998	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4999	    return &pos;
5000	}
5001	if (*p != NUL)
5002	    break;
5003    }
5004    return NULL;
5005}
5006
5007/*
5008 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
5009 */
5010    static int
5011cin_islabel_skip(s)
5012    char_u	**s;
5013{
5014    if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
5015	return FALSE;
5016
5017    while (vim_isIDc(**s))
5018	(*s)++;
5019
5020    *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
5021
5022    /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
5023    return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
5024}
5025
5026/*
5027 * Recognize a label: "label:".
5028 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
5029 */
5030    int
5031cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
5032    int		ind_maxcomment;
5033{
5034    char_u	*s;
5035
5036    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
5037
5038    /*
5039     * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
5040     * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
5041     */
5042    if (cin_isdefault(s))
5043	return FALSE;
5044    if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
5045	return FALSE;
5046
5047    if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
5048    {
5049	/*
5050	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
5051	 * label.
5052	 */
5053	pos_T	cursor_save;
5054	pos_T	*trypos;
5055	char_u	*line;
5056
5057	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5058	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5059	{
5060	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5061
5062	    /*
5063	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
5064	     */
5065	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5066	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5067		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5068
5069	    line = ml_get_curline();
5070	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
5071		continue;
5072	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
5073		continue;
5074
5075	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5076	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
5077		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
5078		    || cin_iscase(line, TRUE)
5079		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
5080		return TRUE;
5081	    return FALSE;
5082	}
5083	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5084	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
5085    }
5086    return FALSE;
5087}
5088
5089/*
5090 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
5091 * Q&D-Implementation:
5092 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
5093 */
5094    static int
5095cin_isinit(void)
5096{
5097    char_u	*s;
5098
5099    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
5100
5101    if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
5102	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
5103
5104    if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
5105	return TRUE;
5106
5107    if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
5108	return TRUE;
5109
5110    return FALSE;
5111}
5112
5113/*
5114 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
5115 */
5116     int
5117cin_iscase(s, strict)
5118    char_u *s;
5119    int strict; /* Allow relaxed check of case statement for JS */
5120{
5121    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5122    if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
5123    {
5124	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
5125	{
5126	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5127	    if (*s == ':')
5128	    {
5129		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
5130		    ++s;
5131		else
5132		    return TRUE;
5133	    }
5134	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
5135		s += 2;			/* skip over ':' */
5136	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
5137		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
5138	    else if (*s == '"')
5139	    {
5140		/* JS etc. */
5141		if (strict)
5142		    return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
5143		else
5144		    return TRUE;
5145	    }
5146	}
5147	return FALSE;
5148    }
5149
5150    if (cin_isdefault(s))
5151	return TRUE;
5152    return FALSE;
5153}
5154
5155/*
5156 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
5157 */
5158    static int
5159cin_isdefault(s)
5160    char_u  *s;
5161{
5162    return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
5163	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
5164	    && s[1] != ':');
5165}
5166
5167/*
5168 * Recognize a "public/private/protected" scope declaration label.
5169 */
5170    int
5171cin_isscopedecl(s)
5172    char_u	*s;
5173{
5174    int		i;
5175
5176    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5177    if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
5178	i = 6;
5179    else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
5180	i = 9;
5181    else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
5182	i = 7;
5183    else
5184	return FALSE;
5185    return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
5186}
5187
5188/*
5189 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
5190 * Return NULL if not found.
5191 *	  case 234:    a = b;
5192 *		       ^
5193 */
5194    static char_u *
5195after_label(l)
5196    char_u  *l;
5197{
5198    for ( ; *l; ++l)
5199    {
5200	if (*l == ':')
5201	{
5202	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
5203		++l;
5204	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1, FALSE))
5205		break;
5206	}
5207	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
5208	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
5209    }
5210    if (*l == NUL)
5211	return NULL;
5212    l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
5213    if (*l == NUL)
5214	return NULL;
5215    return l;
5216}
5217
5218/*
5219 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
5220 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
5221 */
5222    static int
5223get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
5224    linenr_T	lnum;
5225{
5226    char_u	*l;
5227    pos_T	fp;
5228    colnr_T	col;
5229    char_u	*p;
5230
5231    l = ml_get(lnum);
5232    p = after_label(l);
5233    if (p == NULL)
5234	return 0;
5235
5236    fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5237    fp.lnum = lnum;
5238    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5239    return (int)col;
5240}
5241
5242/*
5243 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5244 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp".
5245 *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5246 *		^
5247 */
5248    static int
5249skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5250    linenr_T	lnum;
5251    char_u	**pp;
5252    int		ind_maxcomment;
5253{
5254    char_u	*l;
5255    int		amount;
5256    pos_T	cursor_save;
5257
5258    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5259    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5260    l = ml_get_curline();
5261				    /* XXX */
5262    if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l)
5263					       || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5264    {
5265	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5266	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5267	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
5268	    l = ml_get_curline();
5269    }
5270    else
5271    {
5272	amount = get_indent();
5273	l = ml_get_curline();
5274    }
5275    *pp = l;
5276
5277    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5278    return amount;
5279}
5280
5281/*
5282 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5283 *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
5284 *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
5285 *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
5286 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5287 */
5288    static int
5289cin_first_id_amount()
5290{
5291    char_u	*line, *p, *s;
5292    int		len;
5293    pos_T	fp;
5294    colnr_T	col;
5295
5296    line = ml_get_curline();
5297    p = skipwhite(line);
5298    len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5299    if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5300    {
5301	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5302	len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5303    }
5304    if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5305	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5306    else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5307	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5308    else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5309	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5310    {
5311	s = skipwhite(p + len);
5312	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5313		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5314		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5315		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5316	    p = s;
5317    }
5318    for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5319	;
5320    if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5321	return 0;
5322
5323    p = skipwhite(p + len);
5324    fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5325    fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5326    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5327    return (int)col;
5328}
5329
5330/*
5331 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5332 *       char *foo = "here";
5333 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5334 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5335 *      foo = "asdf\
5336 *	       asdf\
5337 *	       here";
5338 */
5339    static int
5340cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5341    linenr_T	lnum;
5342{
5343    char_u	*line;
5344    char_u	*s;
5345    colnr_T	col;
5346    pos_T	fp;
5347
5348    if (lnum > 1)
5349    {
5350	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5351	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5352	    return -1;
5353    }
5354
5355    line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5356    while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5357    {
5358	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5359	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5360	else
5361	    ++s;
5362    }
5363    if (*s != '=')
5364	return 0;
5365
5366    s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5367    if (cin_nocode(s))
5368	return 0;
5369
5370    if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
5371	++s;
5372
5373    fp.lnum = lnum;
5374    fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5375    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5376    return (int)col;
5377}
5378
5379/*
5380 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5381 */
5382    static int
5383cin_ispreproc(s)
5384    char_u *s;
5385{
5386    s = skipwhite(s);
5387    if (*s == '#')
5388	return TRUE;
5389    return FALSE;
5390}
5391
5392/*
5393 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5394 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
5395 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5396 */
5397    static int
5398cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5399    char_u	**pp;
5400    linenr_T	*lnump;
5401{
5402    char_u	*line = *pp;
5403    linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
5404    int		retval = FALSE;
5405
5406    for (;;)
5407    {
5408	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5409	{
5410	    retval = TRUE;
5411	    *lnump = lnum;
5412	    break;
5413	}
5414	if (lnum == 1)
5415	    break;
5416	line = ml_get(--lnum);
5417	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5418	    break;
5419    }
5420
5421    if (lnum != *lnump)
5422	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5423    return retval;
5424}
5425
5426/*
5427 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5428 */
5429    static int
5430cin_iscomment(p)
5431    char_u  *p;
5432{
5433    return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5434}
5435
5436/*
5437 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5438 */
5439    static int
5440cin_islinecomment(p)
5441    char_u *p;
5442{
5443    return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5444}
5445
5446/*
5447 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5448 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5449 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5450 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5451 */
5452    static int
5453cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5454    char_u	*s;
5455    int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5456    int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
5457{
5458    char_u found_start = 0;
5459
5460    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5461
5462    if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5463	found_start = *s;
5464
5465    while (*s)
5466    {
5467	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5468	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5469	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5470						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5471		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
5472	    return *s;
5473
5474	if (*s)
5475	    s++;
5476    }
5477    return found_start;
5478}
5479
5480/*
5481 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5482 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5483 * no semicolons anywhere.
5484 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5485 * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5486 * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5487 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5488 */
5489    static int
5490cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5491    char_u	**sp;
5492    linenr_T	first_lnum;
5493{
5494    char_u	*s;
5495    linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5496    int		retval = FALSE;
5497
5498    if (sp == NULL)
5499	s = ml_get(lnum);
5500    else
5501	s = *sp;
5502
5503    while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5504    {
5505	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5506	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5507	else
5508	    ++s;
5509    }
5510    if (*s != '(')
5511	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5512
5513    while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5514    {
5515	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5516	{
5517	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5518	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5519	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5520	     *		 defined(y)
5521	     */
5522	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5523	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5524	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5525		retval = TRUE;
5526	    goto done;
5527	}
5528	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5529	{
5530	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5531	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5532		break;
5533
5534	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5535	}
5536	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5537	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5538	else
5539	    ++s;
5540    }
5541
5542done:
5543    if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5544	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5545
5546    return retval;
5547}
5548
5549    static int
5550cin_isif(p)
5551    char_u  *p;
5552{
5553    return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5554}
5555
5556    static int
5557cin_iselse(p)
5558    char_u  *p;
5559{
5560    if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5561	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5562    return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5563}
5564
5565    static int
5566cin_isdo(p)
5567    char_u  *p;
5568{
5569    return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5570}
5571
5572/*
5573 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5574 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5575 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5576 */
5577    static int
5578cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5579    char_u	*p;
5580    linenr_T	lnum;
5581    int		ind_maxparen;
5582{
5583    pos_T	cursor_save;
5584    pos_T	*trypos;
5585    int		retval = FALSE;
5586
5587    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5588    if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5589	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5590    if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5591    {
5592	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5593	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5594	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5595	p = ml_get_curline();
5596	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5597	{
5598	    ++p;
5599	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5600	}
5601	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5602		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5603	    retval = TRUE;
5604	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5605    }
5606    return retval;
5607}
5608
5609/*
5610 * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while.
5611 *    do
5612 *       nothing;
5613 *    while (foo
5614 *	       && bar);  <-- here
5615 * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while".
5616 */
5617    static int
5618cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
5619    int	    terminated;
5620    int	    ind_maxparen;
5621    int	    ind_maxcomment;
5622{
5623    char_u	*line;
5624    char_u	*p;
5625    char_u	*s;
5626    pos_T	*trypos;
5627    int		i;
5628
5629    if (terminated != ';')	/* there must be a ';' at the end */
5630	return FALSE;
5631
5632    p = line = ml_get_curline();
5633    while (*p != NUL)
5634    {
5635	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5636	if (*p == ')')
5637	{
5638	    s = skipwhite(p + 1);
5639	    if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5640	    {
5641		/* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while"
5642		 * before the matching '('.  XXX */
5643		i = (int)(p - line);
5644		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5645		trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment);
5646		if (trypos != NULL)
5647		{
5648		    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum));
5649		    if (*s == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5650			s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5651		    if (STRNCMP(s, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5652		    {
5653			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
5654			return TRUE;
5655		    }
5656		}
5657
5658		/* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */
5659		line = ml_get_curline();
5660		p = line + i;
5661	    }
5662	}
5663	if (*p != NUL)
5664	    ++p;
5665    }
5666    return FALSE;
5667}
5668
5669    static int
5670cin_isbreak(p)
5671    char_u  *p;
5672{
5673    return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5674}
5675
5676/*
5677 * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5678 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5679 *
5680 * class MyClass :
5681 *	baseClass		<-- here
5682 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5683 *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5684 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5685 *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5686 *
5687 * This is a lot of guessing.  Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo".
5688 */
5689    static int
5690cin_is_cpp_baseclass(col)
5691    colnr_T	*col;	    /* return: column to align with */
5692{
5693    char_u	*s;
5694    int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5695    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5696    char_u	*line = ml_get_curline();
5697
5698    *col = 0;
5699
5700    s = skipwhite(line);
5701    if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5702	return FALSE;
5703    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5704    if (*s == NUL)
5705	return FALSE;
5706
5707    cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5708
5709    /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing
5710     * '{' or '}' and start below it.  This handles the following situations:
5711     *	a = cond ?
5712     *	      func() :
5713     *		   asdf;
5714     *	func::foo()
5715     *	      : something
5716     *	{}
5717     *	Foo::Foo (int one, int two)
5718     *		: something(4),
5719     *		somethingelse(3)
5720     *	{}
5721     */
5722    while (lnum > 1)
5723    {
5724	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5725	s = skipwhite(line);
5726	if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL)
5727	    break;
5728	while (*s != NUL)
5729	{
5730	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5731	    if (*s == '{' || *s == '}'
5732		    || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)))
5733		break;
5734	    if (*s != NUL)
5735		++s;
5736	}
5737	if (*s != NUL)
5738	    break;
5739	--lnum;
5740    }
5741
5742    line = ml_get(lnum);
5743    s = cin_skipcomment(line);
5744    for (;;)
5745    {
5746	if (*s == NUL)
5747	{
5748	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
5749		break;
5750	    /* Continue in the cursor line. */
5751	    line = ml_get(++lnum);
5752	    s = cin_skipcomment(line);
5753	    if (*s == NUL)
5754		continue;
5755	}
5756
5757	if (s[0] == ':')
5758	{
5759	    if (s[1] == ':')
5760	    {
5761		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5762		 * initialization any more */
5763		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5764		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5765	    }
5766	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5767	    {
5768		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5769		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or constructor-initialization */
5770		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5771		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5772		*col = 0;
5773		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5774	    }
5775	    else
5776		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5777	}
5778	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5779		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5780	{
5781	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5782	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5783
5784	    if (*s == 'c')
5785		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5786	    else
5787		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5788	}
5789	else
5790	{
5791	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5792	    {
5793		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5794	    }
5795	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5796	    {
5797		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5798		 * something like "):" */
5799		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5800		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5801	    }
5802	    else if (s[0] == '?')
5803	    {
5804		/* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */
5805		return FALSE;
5806	    }
5807	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5808	    {
5809		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5810		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5811		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5812	    }
5813	    else if (*col == 0)
5814	    {
5815		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5816		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5817
5818		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5819		if (cpp_base_class)
5820		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5821	    }
5822
5823	    /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */
5824	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5825		*col = 0;
5826
5827	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5828	}
5829    }
5830
5831    return cpp_base_class;
5832}
5833
5834    static int
5835get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass)
5836    int		col;
5837    int		ind_maxparen;
5838    int		ind_maxcomment;
5839    int		ind_cpp_baseclass;
5840{
5841    int		amount;
5842    colnr_T	vcol;
5843    pos_T	*trypos;
5844
5845    if (col == 0)
5846    {
5847	amount = get_indent();
5848	if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')')
5849		&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
5850						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5851	    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
5852	if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL))
5853	    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
5854    }
5855    else
5856    {
5857	curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
5858	getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL);
5859	amount = (int)vcol;
5860    }
5861    if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass)
5862	amount = ind_cpp_baseclass;
5863    return amount;
5864}
5865
5866/*
5867 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5868 * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5869 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5870 */
5871    static int
5872cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5873    char_u	*s;
5874    char_u	*find;
5875    char_u	*ignore;
5876{
5877    char_u	*p = s;
5878    char_u	*r;
5879    int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5880
5881    while (*p != NUL)
5882    {
5883	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5884	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5885	{
5886	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5887	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5888		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5889	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5890		return TRUE;
5891	}
5892	if (*p != NUL)
5893	    ++p;
5894    }
5895    return FALSE;
5896}
5897
5898/*
5899 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5900 * Return the column found.
5901 */
5902    static int
5903cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5904    pos_T	*trypos;
5905{
5906    char_u	*line;
5907    char_u	*p;
5908
5909    p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5910    while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5911    {
5912	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5913	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5914	else
5915	{
5916	    p = skip_string(p);
5917	    ++p;
5918	}
5919    }
5920    return (int)(p - line);
5921}
5922
5923/*
5924 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5925 * Return NULL if no match found.
5926 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5927 * work. */
5928/* foo()    */
5929/* {	    */
5930/* }	    */
5931
5932    static pos_T *
5933find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5934    int		ind_maxcomment;
5935{
5936    pos_T	cursor_save;
5937    pos_T	*trypos;
5938    pos_T	*pos;
5939    static pos_T	pos_copy;
5940
5941    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5942    while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5943    {
5944	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5945	trypos = &pos_copy;
5946	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5947	pos = NULL;
5948	/* ignore the { if it's in a // or / *  * / comment */
5949	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5950		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5951	    break;
5952	if (pos != NULL)
5953	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5954    }
5955    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5956    return trypos;
5957}
5958
5959/*
5960 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5961 * Return NULL of no match found.
5962 */
5963    static pos_T *
5964find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5965    int		ind_maxparen;
5966    int		ind_maxcomment;
5967{
5968    pos_T	cursor_save;
5969    pos_T	*trypos;
5970    static pos_T pos_copy;
5971
5972    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5973    if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5974    {
5975	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5976	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5977	    trypos = NULL;
5978	else
5979	{
5980	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5981	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5982	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5983	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5984		trypos = NULL;
5985	}
5986    }
5987    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5988    return trypos;
5989}
5990
5991/*
5992 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5993 * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5994 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5995 * looking a few lines further.
5996 */
5997    static int
5998corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5999    int		ind_maxparen;
6000    pos_T	*startpos;
6001{
6002    long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6003
6004    if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
6005	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
6006    return ind_maxparen;
6007}
6008
6009/*
6010 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
6011 * line "l".
6012 */
6013    static int
6014find_last_paren(l, start, end)
6015    char_u	*l;
6016    int		start, end;
6017{
6018    int		i;
6019    int		retval = FALSE;
6020    int		open_count = 0;
6021
6022    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
6023
6024    for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
6025    {
6026	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
6027	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
6028	if (l[i] == start)
6029	    ++open_count;
6030	else if (l[i] == end)
6031	{
6032	    if (open_count > 0)
6033		--open_count;
6034	    else
6035	    {
6036		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
6037		retval = TRUE;
6038	    }
6039	}
6040    }
6041    return retval;
6042}
6043
6044    int
6045get_c_indent()
6046{
6047    /*
6048     * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
6049     * block should be
6050     */
6051    int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6052
6053    /*
6054     * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
6055     * line is imagined to be.
6056     */
6057    int ind_open_imag = 0;
6058
6059    /*
6060     * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not preceded by
6061     * an opening brace.
6062     */
6063    int ind_no_brace = 0;
6064
6065    /*
6066     * column where the first { of a function should be located }
6067     */
6068    int ind_first_open = 0;
6069
6070    /*
6071     * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
6072     * located
6073     */
6074    int ind_open_extra = 0;
6075
6076    /*
6077     * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
6078     * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
6079     * brace should be located
6080     */
6081    int ind_close_extra = 0;
6082
6083    /*
6084     * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
6085     * column is imagined to be
6086     */
6087    int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
6088
6089    /*
6090     * Spaces jump labels should be shifted to the left if N is non-negative,
6091     * otherwise the jump label will be put to column 1.
6092     */
6093    int ind_jump_label = -1;
6094
6095    /*
6096     * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
6097     */
6098    int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6099
6100    /*
6101     * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
6102     */
6103    int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6104
6105    /*
6106     * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
6107     */
6108    int ind_case_break = 0;
6109
6110    /*
6111     * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
6112     * should be located
6113     */
6114    int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6115
6116    /*
6117     * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
6118     */
6119    int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6120
6121    /*
6122     * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
6123     */
6124    int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6125
6126    /*
6127     * amount a function type spec should be indented
6128     */
6129    int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6130
6131    /*
6132     * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
6133     * should be indented
6134     */
6135    int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6136
6137    /*
6138     * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
6139     * should be located
6140     */
6141    int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6142
6143    /*
6144     * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
6145     */
6146    int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
6147
6148    /*
6149     * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
6150     * itself is also unclosed
6151     */
6152    int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6153
6154    /*
6155     * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
6156     * unclosed parentheses.
6157     */
6158    int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
6159
6160    /*
6161     * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
6162     * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
6163     * context (for very long lines).
6164     */
6165    int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
6166
6167    /*
6168     * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
6169     * an unclosed parentheses.
6170     */
6171    int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
6172
6173    /*
6174     * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
6175     * opening parentheses.
6176     */
6177    int ind_matching_paren = 0;
6178
6179    /*
6180     * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line.
6181     */
6182    int ind_paren_prev = 0;
6183
6184    /*
6185     * Extra indent for comments.
6186     */
6187    int ind_comment = 0;
6188
6189    /*
6190     * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
6191     */
6192    int ind_in_comment = 3;
6193
6194    /*
6195     * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
6196     * after the comment opener.
6197     */
6198    int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
6199
6200    /*
6201     * max lines to search for an open paren
6202     */
6203    int ind_maxparen = 20;
6204
6205    /*
6206     * max lines to search for an open comment
6207     */
6208    int ind_maxcomment = 70;
6209
6210    /*
6211     * handle braces for java code
6212     */
6213    int	ind_java = 0;
6214
6215    /*
6216     * not to confuse JS object properties with labels
6217     */
6218    int ind_js = 0;
6219
6220    /*
6221     * handle blocked cases correctly
6222     */
6223    int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
6224
6225    pos_T	cur_curpos;
6226    int		amount;
6227    int		scope_amount;
6228    int		cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6229    colnr_T	col;
6230    char_u	*theline;
6231    char_u	*linecopy;
6232    pos_T	*trypos;
6233    pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
6234    pos_T	our_paren_pos;
6235    char_u	*start;
6236    int		start_brace;
6237#define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6238#define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
6239#define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
6240    linenr_T	ourscope;
6241    char_u	*l;
6242    char_u	*look;
6243    char_u	terminated;
6244    int		lookfor;
6245#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
6246#define LOOKFOR_IF		1
6247#define LOOKFOR_DO		2
6248#define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
6249#define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
6250#define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
6251#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
6252#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
6253#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
6254#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
6255#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
6256
6257    int		whilelevel;
6258    linenr_T	lnum;
6259    char_u	*options;
6260    int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
6261    int		divider;
6262    int		n;
6263    int		iscase;
6264    int		lookfor_break;
6265    int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
6266    int		original_line_islabel;
6267
6268    for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
6269    {
6270	l = options++;
6271	if (*options == '-')
6272	    ++options;
6273	n = getdigits(&options);
6274	divider = 0;
6275	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
6276	{
6277	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
6278	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
6279	    {
6280		++options;
6281		if (divider)
6282		    divider *= 10;
6283		else
6284		    divider = 10;
6285	    }
6286	}
6287	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
6288	{
6289	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
6290		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
6291	    else
6292	    {
6293		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
6294		if (divider)
6295		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
6296	    }
6297	    ++options;
6298	}
6299	if (l[1] == '-')
6300	    n = -n;
6301	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
6302	 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */
6303	switch (*l)
6304	{
6305	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
6306	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
6307	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
6308	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
6309	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
6310	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
6311	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
6312	    case 'L': ind_jump_label = n; break;
6313	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
6314	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
6315	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
6316	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
6317	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
6318	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
6319	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
6320	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
6321	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
6322	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
6323	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
6324	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
6325	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
6326	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
6327	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
6328	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
6329	    case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break;
6330	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
6331	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
6332	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
6333	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
6334	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
6335	    case 'J': ind_js = n; break;
6336	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
6337	    case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break;
6338	}
6339	if (*options == ',')
6340	    ++options;
6341    }
6342
6343    /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
6344    cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
6345
6346    /* if we are at line 1 0 is fine, right? */
6347    if (cur_curpos.lnum == 1)
6348	return 0;
6349
6350    /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
6351     * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
6352     * ml_get is valid! */
6353    linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
6354    if (linecopy == NULL)
6355	return 0;
6356
6357    /*
6358     * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
6359     * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
6360     * inserting new stuff.
6361     * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
6362     * check for that.
6363     */
6364    if ((State & INSERT)
6365	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < (colnr_T)STRLEN(linecopy)
6366	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
6367	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
6368
6369    theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
6370
6371    /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
6372
6373    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6374
6375    original_line_islabel = cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
6376
6377    /*
6378     * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
6379     */
6380    if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
6381    {
6382	amount = 0;
6383    }
6384
6385    /*
6386     * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too unless:
6387     *  - JS flag is set.
6388     *  - 'L' item has a positive value.
6389     */
6390    else if (original_line_islabel && !ind_js && ind_jump_label < 0)
6391    {
6392	amount = 0;
6393    }
6394
6395    /*
6396     * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
6397     * previous line, lineup with that one.
6398     */
6399    else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
6400	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
6401    {
6402	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6403	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6404	amount = col;
6405    }
6406
6407    /*
6408     * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6409     * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6410     */
6411    else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6412	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6413    {
6414	int	lead_start_len = 2;
6415	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
6416	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
6417	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
6418	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
6419	char_u	*p;
6420	int	start_align = 0;
6421	int	start_off = 0;
6422	int	done = FALSE;
6423
6424	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6425	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6426	amount = col;
6427
6428	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6429	while (*p != NUL)
6430	{
6431	    int	align = 0;
6432	    int	off = 0;
6433	    int what = 0;
6434
6435	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6436	    {
6437		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6438		    what = *p++;
6439		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6440		    align = *p++;
6441		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6442		    off = getdigits(&p);
6443		else
6444		    ++p;
6445	    }
6446
6447	    if (*p == ':')
6448		++p;
6449	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6450	    if (what == COM_START)
6451	    {
6452		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6453		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6454		start_off = off;
6455		start_align = align;
6456	    }
6457	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6458	    {
6459		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6460		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6461	    }
6462	    else if (what == COM_END)
6463	    {
6464		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6465		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6466		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6467			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6468		{
6469		    done = TRUE;
6470		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6471		    {
6472			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6473			 * line, use the indent of that line plus offset.  If
6474			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6475			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
6476			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6477			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6478			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6479			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6480							lead_middle_len) == 0)
6481			{
6482			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6483			    break;
6484			}
6485			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6486			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6487			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6488					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6489			    continue;
6490		    }
6491		    if (start_off != 0)
6492			amount += start_off;
6493		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
6494			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6495						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6496		    break;
6497		}
6498
6499		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6500		 * with the middle comment */
6501		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6502			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6503		{
6504		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6505								     /* XXX */
6506		    if (off != 0)
6507			amount += off;
6508		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
6509			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6510						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6511		    done = TRUE;
6512		    break;
6513		}
6514	    }
6515	}
6516
6517	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6518	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6519	 * with the first character of the comment text.
6520	 */
6521	if (done)
6522	    ;
6523	else if (theline[0] == '*')
6524	    amount += 1;
6525	else
6526	{
6527	    /*
6528	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6529	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
6530	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6531	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6532	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6533	     */
6534	    amount = -1;
6535	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6536	    {
6537		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
6538		    continue;
6539		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
6540		break;
6541	    }
6542	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
6543	    {
6544		if (!ind_in_comment2)
6545		{
6546		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6547		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6548		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
6549			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6550		}
6551		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6552		amount = col;
6553		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6554		    amount += ind_in_comment;
6555	    }
6556	}
6557    }
6558
6559    /*
6560     * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6561     */						    /* XXX */
6562    else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6563		&& ind_java == 0)
6564	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6565	    || trypos != NULL)
6566    {
6567      if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6568      {
6569	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
6570	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6571	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6572		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6573		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6574	      trypos = NULL;
6575	  else
6576	      tryposBrace = NULL;
6577      }
6578
6579      if (trypos != NULL)
6580      {
6581	/*
6582	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6583	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6584	 */
6585	if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev)
6586	{
6587	    /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6588	    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);  /* XXX */
6589	}
6590	else
6591	{
6592	    amount = -1;
6593	    our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6594	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6595	    {
6596		l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6597		if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
6598		    continue;
6599		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))
6600		    continue;			/* ignore #define, #if, etc. */
6601		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6602
6603		/* Skip a comment. XXX */
6604		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6605		{
6606		    lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6607		    continue;
6608		}
6609
6610		/* XXX */
6611		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6612				corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6613						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6614			&& trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6615			&& trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6616		{
6617			amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
6618
6619			if (theline[0] == ')')
6620			{
6621			    if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum
6622						       && cur_amount > amount)
6623				cur_amount = amount;
6624			    amount = -1;
6625			}
6626		    break;
6627		}
6628	    }
6629	}
6630
6631	/*
6632	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6633	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6634	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6635	 */
6636	if (amount == -1)
6637	{
6638	    int	    ignore_paren_col = 0;
6639
6640	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6641	    look = skipwhite(look);
6642	    if (*look == '(')
6643	    {
6644		linenr_T    save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6645		char_u	    *line;
6646		int	    look_col;
6647
6648		/* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before
6649		 * our matching '('. */
6650		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6651		line = ml_get_curline();
6652		look_col = (int)(look - line);
6653		curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1;
6654		if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen))
6655								      != NULL
6656			  && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6657			  && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col)
6658		    ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1;
6659
6660		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum;
6661		look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col;
6662	    }
6663	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6664		    || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '('
6665						    && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6666	    {
6667		/*
6668		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6669		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6670		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6671		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6672		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6673		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6674		 * lines).
6675		 */
6676		if (theline[0] != ')')
6677		{
6678		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6679		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6680		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6681				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6682		    {
6683			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6684			 * for each additional level */
6685			n = 1;
6686			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6687			{
6688			    switch (l[col])
6689			    {
6690				case '(':
6691				case '{': ++n;
6692					  break;
6693
6694				case ')':
6695				case '}': if (n > 1)
6696					      --n;
6697					  break;
6698			    }
6699			}
6700
6701			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6702			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6703		    }
6704		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6705			our_paren_pos.col++;
6706		    else
6707		    {
6708			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6709			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6710			    col++;
6711			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6712			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6713			else
6714			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6715		    }
6716		}
6717
6718		/*
6719		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6720		 * if we did the above "if".
6721		 */
6722		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6723		{
6724		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6725		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6726			cur_amount = col;
6727		}
6728	    }
6729
6730	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6731	    {
6732		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6733	    }
6734	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6735				    && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6736	    {
6737		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6738		    amount = cur_amount;
6739	    }
6740	    else
6741	    {
6742		/* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but
6743		 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */
6744		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6745		while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col)
6746		{
6747		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6748		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6749		    {
6750			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6751				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6752				  break;
6753			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6754				  col = MAXCOL;
6755				  break;
6756		    }
6757		}
6758
6759		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6760		 * braces */
6761		if (col == MAXCOL)
6762		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6763		else
6764		{
6765		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6766		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6767		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6768						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6769			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6770		    else
6771			amount += ind_unclosed;
6772		}
6773		/*
6774		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6775		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6776		 * lines:
6777		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6778		 *	arg				    && yy
6779		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6780		 */
6781		if (cur_amount < amount)
6782		    amount = cur_amount;
6783	    }
6784	}
6785
6786	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6787	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6788	    amount += ind_comment;
6789      }
6790
6791      /*
6792       * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6793       */
6794      else
6795      {
6796	trypos = tryposBrace;
6797
6798	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6799	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6800
6801	/*
6802	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6803	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6804	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6805	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6806	 */
6807	look = skipwhite(start);
6808	if (*look == '{')
6809	{
6810	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6811	    amount = col;
6812	    if (*start == '{')
6813		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6814	    else
6815		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6816	}
6817	else
6818	{
6819	    /*
6820	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6821	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6822	     */
6823	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6824
6825	    /*
6826	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6827	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6828	     */
6829	    lnum = ourscope;
6830	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6831		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6832						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6833		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6834
6835	    /*
6836	     * It could have been something like
6837	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6838	     *			ldfd) {
6839	     *		    }
6840	     */
6841	    if ((ind_keep_case_label
6842			   && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()), FALSE)))
6843		amount = get_indent();
6844	    else
6845		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6846
6847	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6848	}
6849
6850	/*
6851	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6852	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6853	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6854	 */
6855	if (theline[0] == '}')
6856	{
6857	    /*
6858	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6859	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6860	     */
6861	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6862	}
6863	else
6864	{
6865	    /*
6866	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6867	     * to match it with.
6868	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6869	     * to match it with.
6870	     */
6871	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6872	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6873		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6874	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6875								    /* XXX */
6876		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6877	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6878	    {
6879		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6880		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6881							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6882		{
6883		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6884		    goto theend;
6885		}
6886	    }
6887
6888	    /*
6889	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6890	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6891	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6892	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6893	     */
6894
6895	    /*
6896	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6897	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6898	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6899	     */
6900
6901	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6902	    {
6903		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6904	    }
6905	    else
6906	    {
6907		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6908		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6909		else
6910		{
6911		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6912		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6913		    if (amount < 0)
6914			amount = 0;
6915		}
6916	    }
6917
6918	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6919
6920	    if (cin_iscase(theline, FALSE))	/* it's a switch() label */
6921	    {
6922		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6923		amount += ind_case;
6924	    }
6925	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6926	    {
6927		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6928		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6929	    }
6930	    else
6931	    {
6932		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6933		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6934
6935		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6936		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6937	    }
6938	    scope_amount = amount;
6939	    whilelevel = 0;
6940
6941	    /*
6942	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6943	     * with that.
6944	     *
6945	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6946	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6947	     * that opens the block.
6948	     */
6949	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6950	    for (;;)
6951	    {
6952		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6953		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6954
6955		/*
6956		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6957		 * up with it.
6958		 */
6959		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6960		{
6961		    /* we reached end of scope:
6962		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6963		     * go further back:
6964		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6965		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6966		     * declaration:
6967		     * int x,
6968		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6969		     */
6970		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6971		    {
6972			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6973				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6974						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6975			{
6976			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6977			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6978			     * initialization) */
6979			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6980				amount = cont_amount;
6981			    else if (!ind_js)
6982				amount += ind_continuation;
6983			    break;
6984			}
6985
6986			l = ml_get_curline();
6987
6988			/*
6989			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6990			 * comment.
6991			 */
6992			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6993			if (trypos != NULL)
6994			{
6995			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6996			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6997			    continue;
6998			}
6999
7000			/*
7001			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7002			 */
7003			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7004			    continue;
7005
7006			if (cin_nocode(l))
7007			    continue;
7008
7009			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
7010
7011			/*
7012			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
7013			 * function declaration, we are done
7014			 * (it's a variable declaration).
7015			 */
7016			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
7017				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7018			{
7019			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
7020			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
7021			     * don't add extra indent.
7022			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
7023			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
7024			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
7025			     */
7026			    if (terminated == ',')
7027				break;
7028
7029			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
7030			     * we are done.
7031			     */
7032			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
7033				break;
7034
7035			    /* nothing useful found */
7036			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
7037				continue;
7038			}
7039
7040			if (terminated != ';')
7041			{
7042			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
7043			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
7044			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
7045			     */					/* XXX */
7046			    trypos = NULL;
7047			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
7048				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7049					ind_maxcomment);
7050
7051			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
7052				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
7053
7054			    if (trypos != NULL)
7055			    {
7056				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7057				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7058				continue;
7059			    }
7060			}
7061
7062			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
7063			 * like in
7064			 * int a,
7065			 *    b;
7066			 */
7067			if (cont_amount > 0)
7068			    amount = cont_amount;
7069			else
7070			    amount += ind_continuation;
7071		    }
7072		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7073		    {
7074			if (cont_amount > 0)
7075			    amount = cont_amount;
7076			else
7077			    amount += ind_continuation;
7078		    }
7079		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
7080					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7081		    {
7082			amount = scope_amount;
7083			if (theline[0] == '{')
7084			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7085		    }
7086		    break;
7087		}
7088
7089		/*
7090		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7091		 */					    /* XXX */
7092		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7093		{
7094		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7095		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7096		    continue;
7097		}
7098
7099		l = ml_get_curline();
7100
7101		/*
7102		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
7103		 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
7104		 */
7105		iscase = cin_iscase(l, FALSE);
7106		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7107		{
7108		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
7109		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
7110		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7111			break;
7112
7113		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
7114		     * labels. */
7115		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7116			continue;
7117
7118		    /*
7119		     *	case xx:
7120		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
7121		     *->	   here;
7122		     */
7123		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7124					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7125		    {
7126			if (cont_amount > 0)
7127			    amount = cont_amount;
7128			else
7129			    amount += ind_continuation;
7130			break;
7131		    }
7132
7133		    /*
7134		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
7135		     *	    x = 333;
7136		     *	case yy:
7137		     */
7138		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
7139			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
7140			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
7141		    {
7142			/*
7143			 * Check that this case label is not for another
7144			 * switch()
7145			 */				    /* XXX */
7146			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
7147					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
7148			{
7149			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7150			    break;
7151			}
7152			continue;
7153		    }
7154
7155		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
7156
7157		    /*
7158		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
7159		     *		      y = y + 1;
7160		     * ->	  s = 99;
7161		     *
7162		     *	 case xx:
7163		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
7164		     *		 y = y + 1;
7165		     * ->    s = 99;
7166		     */
7167		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7168		    {
7169			if (n)
7170			    amount = n;
7171
7172			if (!lookfor_break)
7173			    break;
7174		    }
7175
7176		    /*
7177		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
7178		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
7179		     *
7180		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
7181		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
7182		     */
7183		    if (n)
7184		    {
7185			amount = n;
7186			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7187			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
7188			{
7189			    if (theline[0] == '{')
7190				amount += ind_open_extra;
7191			    else
7192				amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7193			}
7194			break;
7195		    }
7196
7197		    /*
7198		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
7199		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
7200		     * switch label.
7201		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
7202		     *	 case xx:
7203		     * ->   y = 1;
7204		     */
7205		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
7206					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
7207		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
7208		    continue;
7209		}
7210
7211		/*
7212		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
7213		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
7214		 */
7215		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
7216		{
7217		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
7218				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7219		    {
7220			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7221			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7222		    }
7223		    continue;
7224		}
7225
7226		/*
7227		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
7228		 */
7229		if (!ind_js && cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
7230		{
7231		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7232		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
7233			continue;
7234		}
7235
7236		/*
7237		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
7238		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
7239		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
7240		 * unlocked it)
7241		 */
7242		l = ml_get_curline();
7243		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
7244							     || cin_nocode(l))
7245		    continue;
7246
7247		/*
7248		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7249		 * constructor initialization?
7250		 */						    /* XXX */
7251		n = FALSE;
7252		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0)
7253		{
7254		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
7255		    l = ml_get_curline();
7256		}
7257		if (n)
7258		{
7259		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7260		    {
7261			if (cont_amount > 0)
7262			    amount = cont_amount;
7263			else
7264			    amount += ind_continuation;
7265		    }
7266		    else if (theline[0] == '{')
7267		    {
7268			/* Need to find start of the declaration. */
7269			lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7270			ind_continuation = 0;
7271			continue;
7272		    }
7273		    else
7274								     /* XXX */
7275			amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7276					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7277		    break;
7278		}
7279		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7280		{
7281		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
7282		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace.
7283		     */
7284		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
7285			break;
7286		    else
7287			continue;
7288		}
7289
7290		/*
7291		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
7292		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
7293		 * there is another unterminated statement behind, eg:
7294		 *   123,
7295		 *   sizeof
7296		 *	  here
7297		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
7298		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
7299		 * (indented).
7300		 */
7301		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
7302
7303		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7304							&& terminated == ','))
7305		{
7306		    /*
7307		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
7308		     * go back to the line that starts it so
7309		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
7310		     *	   if ( foo &&
7311		     *		    bar )
7312		     */
7313		    /*
7314		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7315		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7316		     */
7317		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7318		    trypos = find_match_paren(
7319				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
7320							      ind_maxcomment);
7321
7322		    /*
7323		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
7324		     * braces.
7325		     */
7326		    if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ','
7327					      && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
7328			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
7329
7330		    if (trypos != NULL)
7331		    {
7332			/*
7333			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7334			 * handled above.
7335			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7336			 *			asdf)
7337			 */
7338			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7339			l = ml_get_curline();
7340			if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7341			{
7342			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7343			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7344			    continue;
7345			}
7346		    }
7347
7348		    /*
7349		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
7350		     * indent from
7351		     * char *usethis = "bla\
7352		     *		 bla",
7353		     *      here;
7354		     */
7355		    if (terminated == ',')
7356		    {
7357			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7358			{
7359			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7360			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7361				break;
7362			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7363			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7364			}
7365		    }
7366
7367		    /*
7368		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7369		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
7370		     */
7371		    if (!ind_js)
7372			cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7373							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7374		    else
7375			cur_amount = get_indent();
7376		    /*
7377		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
7378		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
7379		     *		while (not)
7380		     * ->	{
7381		     *		}
7382		     */
7383		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
7384							 && theline[0] == '{')
7385		    {
7386			amount = cur_amount;
7387			/*
7388			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
7389			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
7390			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
7391			 *	{ 1, 2 },
7392			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
7393			 */
7394			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
7395			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7396
7397			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
7398			{
7399			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
7400			     * class declaration or initialization */
7401			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7402			    continue;
7403			}
7404			break;
7405		    }
7406
7407		    /*
7408		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
7409		     * Also allow "   } else".
7410		     */
7411		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
7412		    {
7413			/*
7414			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
7415			 * with the last one.
7416			 *   if (cond)
7417			 *	    100 +
7418			 * ->		here;
7419			 */
7420			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7421					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7422			{
7423			    if (cont_amount > 0)
7424				amount = cont_amount;
7425			    else
7426				amount += ind_continuation;
7427			    break;
7428			}
7429
7430			/*
7431			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
7432			 * are finished.
7433			 *	    while (not)
7434			 * ->		here;
7435			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
7436			 * before this is terminated.
7437			 *	yyy;
7438			 *	if (stat)
7439			 *	    while (not)
7440			 *		xxx;
7441			 * ->	here;
7442			 */
7443			amount = cur_amount;
7444			if (theline[0] == '{')
7445			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7446			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7447			{
7448			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7449			    break;
7450			}
7451
7452			/*
7453			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
7454			 * do, line up with the while()
7455			 *     do
7456			 *	    x = 1;
7457			 * ->  here
7458			 */
7459			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7460			if (cin_isdo(l))
7461			{
7462			    if (whilelevel == 0)
7463				break;
7464			    --whilelevel;
7465			}
7466
7467			/*
7468			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7469			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7470			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7471			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7472			 */
7473			if (cin_iselse(l)
7474				&& whilelevel == 0
7475				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7476								    == NULL
7477				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7478					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7479			    break;
7480		    }
7481
7482		    /*
7483		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7484		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7485		     * add something for a continuation line, depending on
7486		     * the line before this one.
7487		     */
7488		    else
7489		    {
7490			/*
7491			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7492			 * the last one.
7493			 *   c = 99 +
7494			 *	    100 +
7495			 * ->	    here;
7496			 */
7497			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7498			{
7499			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7500			    if (terminated == ',')
7501				amount += ind_continuation;
7502			    break;
7503			}
7504
7505			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7506			{
7507			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7508			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7509			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7510			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
7511			     * enumerations/initializations. */
7512			    if (terminated == ',')
7513			    {
7514				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7515				    break;
7516
7517				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7518				continue;
7519			    }
7520
7521			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7522			     * reduce indent. */
7523			    if (amount > cur_amount)
7524				amount = cur_amount;
7525			}
7526			else
7527			{
7528			    /*
7529			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7530			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
7531			     *	    100 +
7532			     * ->	    here;
7533			     */
7534			    amount = cur_amount;
7535
7536			    /*
7537			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7538			     * are in an initialization or enum
7539			     * struct xxx =
7540			     * {
7541			     *      sizeof a,
7542			     *      124 };
7543			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
7544			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
7545			     * yet.
7546			     */
7547			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7548			    {
7549				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7550				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7551			    }
7552			    else
7553			    {
7554				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7555					&& *l != NUL
7556					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7557								/* XXX */
7558				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7559						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7560				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7561				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7562			    }
7563			}
7564		    }
7565		}
7566
7567		/*
7568		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7569		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7570		 */
7571							/* XXX */
7572		else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen,
7573							      ind_maxcomment))
7574		{
7575		    /*
7576		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7577		     * with the last one.
7578		     *	    while (cond);
7579		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
7580		     * ->	    here;
7581		     */
7582		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7583					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7584		    {
7585			if (cont_amount > 0)
7586			    amount = cont_amount;
7587			else
7588			    amount += ind_continuation;
7589			break;
7590		    }
7591
7592		    if (whilelevel == 0)
7593		    {
7594			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7595			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7596			if (theline[0] == '{')
7597			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7598		    }
7599		    ++whilelevel;
7600		}
7601
7602		/*
7603		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7604		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7605		 * indent of that other statement.
7606		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7607		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7608		 */
7609		else
7610		{
7611		    /*
7612		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7613		     * may be lined up with the case label.
7614		     */
7615		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7616				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7617		    {
7618			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7619			continue;
7620		    }
7621
7622		    /*
7623		     * Handle "do {" line.
7624		     */
7625		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7626		    {
7627			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7628			if (cin_isdo(l))
7629			{
7630			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7631			    --whilelevel;
7632			    continue;
7633			}
7634		    }
7635
7636		    /*
7637		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7638		     * the amount for a continuation line.
7639		     *	 x = 1;
7640		     *	 y = foo +
7641		     * ->	here;
7642		     * or
7643		     *	 int x = 1;
7644		     *	 int foo,
7645		     * ->	here;
7646		     */
7647		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7648					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7649		    {
7650			if (cont_amount > 0)
7651			    amount = cont_amount;
7652			else
7653			    amount += ind_continuation;
7654			break;
7655		    }
7656
7657		    /*
7658		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7659		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7660		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
7661		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
7662		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
7663		     *		here;
7664		     * ->foo;
7665		     */
7666		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7667		    {
7668			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7669			    break;
7670		    }
7671
7672		    /*
7673		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7674		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7675		     * a terminated line.
7676		     */
7677		    else
7678		    {
7679			/*
7680			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7681			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7682			 * the line.  Helps for:
7683			 *     func(asdr,
7684			 *	      asdfasdf);
7685			 *     here;
7686			 */
7687term_again:
7688			l = ml_get_curline();
7689			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7690				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7691						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7692			{
7693			    /*
7694			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7695			     * handled above.
7696			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7697			     *			    asdf)
7698			     */
7699			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7700			    l = ml_get_curline();
7701			    if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7702			    {
7703				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7704				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7705				continue;
7706			    }
7707			}
7708
7709			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7710			 * with a statement after it.
7711			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7712			 *	stat;
7713			 *  }
7714			 *  case 2:
7715			 *	stat;
7716			 * }
7717			 */
7718			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l, FALSE));
7719
7720			/*
7721			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7722			 * ignoring any jump label.
7723			 */
7724			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7725							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7726
7727			if (theline[0] == '{')
7728			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7729			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7730			l = skipwhite(l);
7731			if (*l == '{')
7732			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7733			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7734
7735			/*
7736			 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to
7737			 * the matching "if":
7738			 *       else 3;
7739			 *	     indent this;
7740			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7741			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7742			 */
7743			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM
7744				&& *l != '}'
7745				&& cin_iselse(l)
7746				&& whilelevel == 0)
7747			{
7748			    if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7749								       == NULL
7750				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7751					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)
7752				break;
7753			    continue;
7754			}
7755
7756			/*
7757			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7758			 * that block.
7759			 */
7760			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7761			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7762				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7763							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7764			{
7765			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7766			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7767			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7768			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7769			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7770				goto term_again;
7771			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7772			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7773			}
7774		    }
7775		}
7776	    }
7777	}
7778      }
7779
7780      /* add extra indent for a comment */
7781      if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7782	  amount += ind_comment;
7783
7784      /* subtract extra left-shift for jump labels */
7785      if (ind_jump_label > 0 && original_line_islabel)
7786	  amount -= ind_jump_label;
7787    }
7788
7789    /*
7790     * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7791     *
7792     * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7793     * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7794     * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7795     * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7796     */
7797    else
7798    {
7799	/*
7800	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7801	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7802	 * of a function
7803	 */
7804
7805	if (theline[0] == '{')
7806	{
7807	    amount = ind_first_open;
7808	}
7809
7810	/*
7811	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7812	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7813	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment or if the
7814	 * current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';', or if the current line
7815	 * contains { or }: "void f() {\n if (1)"
7816	 */
7817	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7818		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7819		&& vim_strchr(theline, '{') == NULL
7820		&& vim_strchr(theline, '}') == NULL
7821		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7822		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7823		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7824		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7825	{
7826	    amount = ind_func_type;
7827	}
7828	else
7829	{
7830	    amount = 0;
7831	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7832
7833	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7834
7835	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7836	    {
7837		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7838		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7839
7840		l = ml_get_curline();
7841
7842		/*
7843		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7844		 */						/* XXX */
7845		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7846		{
7847		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7848		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7849		    continue;
7850		}
7851
7852		/*
7853		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7854		 * constructor initialization?
7855		 */						    /* XXX */
7856		n = FALSE;
7857		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{')
7858		{
7859		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
7860		    l = ml_get_curline();
7861		}
7862		if (n)
7863		{
7864								     /* XXX */
7865		    amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7866					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7867		    break;
7868		}
7869
7870		/*
7871		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7872		 */
7873		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7874		    continue;
7875
7876		if (cin_nocode(l))
7877		    continue;
7878
7879		/*
7880		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7881		 * indentation:
7882		 * int foo,
7883		 *     bar;
7884		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7885		 * enum foobar
7886		 * {
7887		 *   ...
7888		 * } foo,
7889		 *   bar;
7890		 */
7891		n = 0;
7892		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7893			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7894		{
7895		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7896		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7897			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7898						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7899			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7900
7901		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7902		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7903		     * char *foo = "bla\
7904		     *		 bla",
7905		     *      here;
7906		     */
7907		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7908		    {
7909			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7910			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7911			    break;
7912			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7913			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7914		    }
7915
7916		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7917
7918		    if (amount == 0)
7919			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7920		    if (amount == 0)
7921			amount = ind_continuation;
7922		    break;
7923		}
7924
7925		/*
7926		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7927		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7928		 */
7929		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7930		    break;
7931		l = ml_get_curline();
7932
7933		/*
7934		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7935		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7936		 */
7937		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7938		    break;
7939
7940		/*			    (matching {)
7941		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7942		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7943		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7944		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7945		 */
7946		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7947		    break;
7948
7949		/*
7950		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7951		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7952		 * parameters.
7953		 */
7954		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7955		{
7956		    amount = ind_param;
7957		    break;
7958		}
7959
7960		/*
7961		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7962		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7963		 * int foo,
7964		 *     bar;
7965		 * indent_to_0 here;
7966		 */
7967		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL))
7968		{
7969		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7970		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7971			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7972			break;
7973		    l = ml_get_curline();
7974		}
7975
7976		/*
7977		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7978		 * use the indent of this line.
7979		 *
7980		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7981		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7982		 */
7983		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7984
7985		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7986						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7987		    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7988		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7989		break;
7990	    }
7991
7992	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7993	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7994		amount += ind_comment;
7995
7996	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7997	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7998	     *		  here";
7999	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
8000	     *			 here";
8001	     */
8002	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
8003	    {
8004		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
8005		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
8006		{
8007		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
8008		    if (cur_amount > 0)
8009			amount = cur_amount;
8010		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
8011			amount += ind_continuation;
8012		}
8013	    }
8014	}
8015    }
8016
8017theend:
8018    /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
8019    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
8020
8021    vim_free(linecopy);
8022
8023    if (amount < 0)
8024	return 0;
8025    return amount;
8026}
8027
8028    static int
8029find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
8030    int		lookfor;
8031    linenr_T	ourscope;
8032    int		ind_maxparen;
8033    int		ind_maxcomment;
8034{
8035    char_u	*look;
8036    pos_T	*theirscope;
8037    char_u	*mightbeif;
8038    int		elselevel;
8039    int		whilelevel;
8040
8041    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
8042    {
8043	elselevel = 1;
8044	whilelevel = 0;
8045    }
8046    else
8047    {
8048	elselevel = 0;
8049	whilelevel = 1;
8050    }
8051
8052    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
8053
8054    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
8055    {
8056	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
8057	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
8058
8059	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
8060	if (cin_iselse(look)
8061		|| cin_isif(look)
8062		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
8063		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
8064	{
8065	    /*
8066	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
8067	     * we must be out of scope...
8068	     */
8069	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
8070	    if (theirscope == NULL)
8071		break;
8072
8073	    /*
8074	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
8075	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
8076	     * out of luck too.
8077	     */
8078	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
8079		break;
8080
8081	    /*
8082	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
8083	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
8084	     * different scope...
8085	     */
8086	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
8087		continue;
8088
8089	    /*
8090	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
8091	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
8092	     * increment elselevel
8093	     */
8094	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
8095	    if (cin_iselse(look))
8096	    {
8097		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
8098		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
8099		    ++elselevel;
8100		continue;
8101	    }
8102
8103	    /*
8104	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
8105	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
8106	     */
8107	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
8108	    {
8109		++whilelevel;
8110		continue;
8111	    }
8112
8113	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
8114	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
8115	    if (cin_isif(look))
8116	    {
8117		elselevel--;
8118		/*
8119		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
8120		 * get in the way.
8121		 */
8122		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
8123		    whilelevel = 0;
8124	    }
8125
8126	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
8127	    if (cin_isdo(look))
8128		whilelevel--;
8129
8130	    /*
8131	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
8132	     * this must be the if that we want!
8133	     * match the indent level of that if.
8134	     */
8135	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
8136	    {
8137		return OK;
8138	    }
8139	}
8140    }
8141    return FAIL;
8142}
8143
8144# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8145/*
8146 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
8147 */
8148    int
8149get_expr_indent()
8150{
8151    int		indent;
8152    pos_T	pos;
8153    int		save_State;
8154    int		use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr",
8155								   OPT_LOCAL);
8156
8157    pos = curwin->w_cursor;
8158    set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
8159    if (use_sandbox)
8160	++sandbox;
8161    ++textlock;
8162    indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
8163    if (use_sandbox)
8164	--sandbox;
8165    --textlock;
8166
8167    /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
8168     * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
8169     * command. */
8170    save_State = State;
8171    State = INSERT;
8172    curwin->w_cursor = pos;
8173    check_cursor();
8174    State = save_State;
8175
8176    /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
8177    if (indent < 0)
8178	indent = get_indent();
8179
8180    return indent;
8181}
8182# endif
8183
8184#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
8185
8186#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
8187
8188static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
8189
8190    static int
8191lisp_match(p)
8192    char_u	*p;
8193{
8194    char_u	buf[LSIZE];
8195    int		len;
8196    char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
8197
8198    while (*word != NUL)
8199    {
8200	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
8201	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8202	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
8203	    return TRUE;
8204    }
8205    return FALSE;
8206}
8207
8208/*
8209 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
8210 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
8211 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
8212 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
8213 *
8214 * TODO:
8215 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
8216 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
8217 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
8218 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
8219 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
8220 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
8221 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
8222 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
8223 */
8224    int
8225get_lisp_indent()
8226{
8227    pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
8228    int		amount;
8229    char_u	*that;
8230    colnr_T	col;
8231    colnr_T	firsttry;
8232    int		parencount, quotecount;
8233    int		vi_lisp;
8234
8235    /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
8236    vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
8237
8238    realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
8239    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
8240
8241    if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
8242	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8243    else
8244    {
8245	paren = *pos;
8246	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8247	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
8248	    pos = &paren;
8249    }
8250    if (pos != NULL)
8251    {
8252	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
8253	 * line that is at the same () level. */
8254	amount = -1;
8255	parencount = 0;
8256
8257	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
8258	{
8259	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
8260		continue;
8261	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
8262	    {
8263		if (*that == ';')
8264		{
8265		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8266			++that;
8267		    continue;
8268		}
8269		if (*that == '\\')
8270		{
8271		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8272			++that;
8273		    continue;
8274		}
8275		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
8276		{
8277		    while (*++that && *that != '"')
8278		    {
8279			/* skipping escaped characters in the string */
8280			if (*that == '\\')
8281			{
8282			    if (*++that == NUL)
8283				break;
8284			    if (that[1] == NUL)
8285			    {
8286				++that;
8287				break;
8288			    }
8289			}
8290		    }
8291		}
8292		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8293		    ++parencount;
8294		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8295		    --parencount;
8296	    }
8297	    if (parencount == 0)
8298	    {
8299		amount = get_indent();
8300		break;
8301	    }
8302	}
8303
8304	if (amount == -1)
8305	{
8306	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
8307	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
8308	    col = pos->col;
8309
8310	    that = ml_get_curline();
8311
8312	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
8313		amount = 2;
8314	    else
8315	    {
8316		amount = 0;
8317		while (*that && col)
8318		{
8319		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
8320		    col--;
8321		}
8322
8323		/*
8324		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
8325		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
8326		 *
8327		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
8328		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
8329		 */
8330
8331		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8332						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
8333		    amount += 2;
8334		else
8335		{
8336		    that++;
8337		    amount++;
8338		    firsttry = amount;
8339
8340		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8341		    {
8342			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8343			++that;
8344		    }
8345
8346		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
8347		    {
8348			/* test *that != '(' to accommodate first let/do
8349			 * argument if it is more than one line */
8350			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
8351			    firsttry++;
8352
8353			parencount = 0;
8354			quotecount = 0;
8355
8356			if (vi_lisp
8357				|| (*that != '"'
8358				    && *that != '\''
8359				    && *that != '#'
8360				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
8361			{
8362			    while (*that
8363				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
8364					|| quotecount
8365					|| parencount)
8366				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8367					    && !quotecount
8368					    && !parencount
8369					    && vi_lisp)))
8370			    {
8371				if (*that == '"')
8372				    quotecount = !quotecount;
8373				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8374							       && !quotecount)
8375				    ++parencount;
8376				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8377							       && !quotecount)
8378				    --parencount;
8379				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
8380				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8381							     (colnr_T)amount);
8382				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8383							     (colnr_T)amount);
8384			    }
8385			}
8386			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8387			{
8388			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8389			    that++;
8390			}
8391			if (!*that || *that == ';')
8392			    amount = firsttry;
8393		    }
8394		}
8395	    }
8396	}
8397    }
8398    else
8399	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
8400
8401    curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
8402
8403    return amount;
8404}
8405#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
8406
8407    void
8408prepare_to_exit()
8409{
8410#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
8411    /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
8412     * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
8413     * problems. */
8414    signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
8415#endif
8416
8417#ifdef FEAT_GUI
8418    if (gui.in_use)
8419    {
8420	gui.dying = TRUE;
8421	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
8422    }
8423    else
8424#endif
8425    {
8426	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
8427
8428	/*
8429	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
8430	 * screen (if there are two screens).
8431	 */
8432	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
8433#ifdef WIN3264
8434	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
8435#endif
8436	    stoptermcap();
8437	out_flush();
8438    }
8439}
8440
8441/*
8442 * Preserve files and exit.
8443 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
8444 */
8445    void
8446preserve_exit()
8447{
8448    buf_T	*buf;
8449
8450    prepare_to_exit();
8451
8452    /* Setting this will prevent free() calls.  That avoids calling free()
8453     * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
8454    really_exiting = TRUE;
8455
8456    out_str(IObuff);
8457    screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8458    out_flush();
8459
8460    ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
8461
8462    for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
8463    {
8464	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
8465	{
8466	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
8467	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8468	    out_flush();
8469	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
8470	    break;
8471	}
8472    }
8473
8474    ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
8475
8476    OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
8477
8478    getout(1);
8479}
8480
8481/*
8482 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
8483 */
8484    int
8485vim_fexists(fname)
8486    char_u  *fname;
8487{
8488    struct stat st;
8489
8490    if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
8491	return FALSE;
8492    return TRUE;
8493}
8494
8495/*
8496 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
8497 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
8498 * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
8499 * time, because it can be a system call.
8500 */
8501
8502#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8503# ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8504#  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8505# else
8506#  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8507# endif
8508#endif
8509
8510static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
8511
8512    void
8513line_breakcheck()
8514{
8515    if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8516    {
8517	breakcheck_count = 0;
8518	ui_breakcheck();
8519    }
8520}
8521
8522/*
8523 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8524 */
8525    void
8526fast_breakcheck()
8527{
8528    if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8529    {
8530	breakcheck_count = 0;
8531	ui_breakcheck();
8532    }
8533}
8534
8535/*
8536 * Invoke expand_wildcards() for one pattern.
8537 * Expand items like "%:h" before the expansion.
8538 * Returns OK or FAIL.
8539 */
8540    int
8541expand_wildcards_eval(pat, num_file, file, flags)
8542    char_u	 **pat;		/* pointer to input pattern */
8543    int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8544    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8545    int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8546{
8547    int		ret = FAIL;
8548    char_u	*eval_pat = NULL;
8549    char_u	*exp_pat = *pat;
8550    char_u      *ignored_msg;
8551    int		usedlen;
8552
8553    if (*exp_pat == '%' || *exp_pat == '#' || *exp_pat == '<')
8554    {
8555	++emsg_off;
8556	eval_pat = eval_vars(exp_pat, exp_pat, &usedlen,
8557						    NULL, &ignored_msg, NULL);
8558	--emsg_off;
8559	if (eval_pat != NULL)
8560	    exp_pat = concat_str(eval_pat, exp_pat + usedlen);
8561    }
8562
8563    if (exp_pat != NULL)
8564	ret = expand_wildcards(1, &exp_pat, num_file, file, flags);
8565
8566    if (eval_pat != NULL)
8567    {
8568	vim_free(exp_pat);
8569	vim_free(eval_pat);
8570    }
8571
8572    return ret;
8573}
8574
8575/*
8576 * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8577 * 'wildignore'.
8578 * Returns OK or FAIL.  When FAIL then "num_file" won't be set.
8579 */
8580    int
8581expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8582    int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8583    char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8584    int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8585    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8586    int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8587{
8588    int		retval;
8589    int		i, j;
8590    char_u	*p;
8591    int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
8592
8593    retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8594
8595    /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8596    if ((flags & EW_KEEPALL) || retval == FAIL)
8597	return retval;
8598
8599#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8600    /*
8601     * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8602     */
8603    if (*p_wig)
8604    {
8605	char_u	*ffname;
8606
8607	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
8608	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8609	{
8610	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8611	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
8612		break;
8613# ifdef VMS
8614	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
8615# endif
8616	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8617	    {
8618		/* remove this matching file from the list */
8619		vim_free((*file)[i]);
8620		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8621		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8622		--*num_file;
8623		--i;
8624	    }
8625	    vim_free(ffname);
8626	}
8627    }
8628#endif
8629
8630    /*
8631     * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8632     */
8633    if (*num_file > 1)
8634    {
8635	non_suf_match = 0;
8636	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8637	{
8638	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8639	    {
8640		/*
8641		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8642		 * of the list.
8643		 */
8644		p = (*file)[i];
8645		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8646		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8647		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8648	    }
8649	}
8650    }
8651
8652    return retval;
8653}
8654
8655/*
8656 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8657 */
8658    int
8659match_suffix(fname)
8660    char_u	*fname;
8661{
8662    int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
8663    char_u	*setsuf;
8664#define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8665    char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8666
8667    fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8668    setsuflen = 0;
8669    for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8670    {
8671	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8672	if (setsuflen == 0)
8673	{
8674	    char_u *tail = gettail(fname);
8675
8676	    /* empty entry: match name without a '.' */
8677	    if (vim_strchr(tail, '.') == NULL)
8678	    {
8679		setsuflen = 1;
8680		break;
8681	    }
8682	}
8683	else
8684	{
8685	    if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8686		    && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8687						  (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8688		break;
8689	    setsuflen = 0;
8690	}
8691    }
8692    return (setsuflen != 0);
8693}
8694
8695#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8696
8697# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8698static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8699static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8700# endif
8701
8702# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8703/*
8704 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
8705 * it's shared between these systems.
8706 */
8707# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8708#  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8709# else
8710#  ifdef __BORLANDC__
8711#   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8712#  endif
8713# endif
8714
8715/*
8716 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8717 */
8718    static int _cdecl
8719pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8720{
8721    return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8722}
8723
8724# ifndef WIN3264
8725    static void
8726namelowcpy(
8727    char_u *d,
8728    char_u *s)
8729{
8730#  ifdef DJGPP
8731    if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8732	while (*s)
8733	    *d++ = *s++;
8734    else
8735#  endif
8736	while (*s)
8737	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8738    *d = NUL;
8739}
8740# endif
8741
8742/*
8743 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8744 * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8745 * Return the number of matches found.
8746 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8747 * at "path[wildoff]".
8748 * Return the number of matches found.
8749 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8750 */
8751    static int
8752dos_expandpath(
8753    garray_T	*gap,
8754    char_u	*path,
8755    int		wildoff,
8756    int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
8757    int		didstar)	/* expanded "**" once already */
8758{
8759    char_u	*buf;
8760    char_u	*path_end;
8761    char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8762    int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8763    char_u	*pat;
8764    regmatch_T	regmatch;
8765    int		starts_with_dot;
8766    int		matches;
8767    int		len;
8768    int		starstar = FALSE;
8769    static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8770#ifdef WIN3264
8771    WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
8772    HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8773# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8774    WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
8775    WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8776# endif
8777#else
8778    struct ffblk	fb;
8779#endif
8780    char_u		*matchname;
8781    int			ok;
8782
8783    /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8784    if (stardepth > 0)
8785    {
8786	ui_breakcheck();
8787	if (got_int)
8788	    return 0;
8789    }
8790
8791    /* make room for file name */
8792    buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8793    if (buf == NULL)
8794	return 0;
8795
8796    /*
8797     * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8798     * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8799     */
8800    p = buf;
8801    s = buf;
8802    e = NULL;
8803    path_end = path;
8804    while (*path_end != NUL)
8805    {
8806	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8807	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8808	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8809	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8810	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8811	{
8812	    if (e != NULL)
8813		break;
8814	    s = p + 1;
8815	}
8816	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8817			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8818	    e = p;
8819#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8820	if (has_mbyte)
8821	{
8822	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8823	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8824	    p += len;
8825	    path_end += len;
8826	}
8827	else
8828#endif
8829	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8830    }
8831    e = p;
8832    *e = NUL;
8833
8834    /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8835    /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8836     * component. */
8837    for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8838	if (rem_backslash(p))
8839	{
8840	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
8841	    --e;
8842	    --s;
8843	}
8844
8845    /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8846    for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8847	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8848	    starstar = TRUE;
8849
8850    starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8851    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8852    if (pat == NULL)
8853    {
8854	vim_free(buf);
8855	return 0;
8856    }
8857
8858    /* compile the regexp into a program */
8859    regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8860    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8861    vim_free(pat);
8862
8863    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8864    {
8865	vim_free(buf);
8866	return 0;
8867    }
8868
8869    /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8870    matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8871
8872    /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8873     * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8874    if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8875							  && *path_end == '/')
8876    {
8877	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8878	++stardepth;
8879	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8880	--stardepth;
8881    }
8882
8883    /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8884    STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8885#ifdef WIN3264
8886# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8887    if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8888    {
8889	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8890	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8891	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8892	wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
8893	if (wn != NULL)
8894	{
8895	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8896	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8897			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8898	    {
8899		vim_free(wn);
8900		wn = NULL;
8901	    }
8902	}
8903    }
8904
8905    if (wn == NULL)
8906# endif
8907	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8908    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8909#else
8910    /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8911    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8912		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8913#endif
8914
8915    while (ok)
8916    {
8917#ifdef WIN3264
8918# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8919	if (wn != NULL)
8920	    p = utf16_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8921	else
8922# endif
8923	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8924#else
8925	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8926#endif
8927	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8928	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8929	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8930		&& (matchname == NULL
8931		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8932	{
8933#ifdef WIN3264
8934	    STRCPY(s, p);
8935#else
8936	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8937#endif
8938	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8939
8940	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8941	    {
8942		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8943		 * find matches. */
8944		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8945		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8946		++stardepth;
8947		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8948		--stardepth;
8949	    }
8950
8951	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8952	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8953	    {
8954		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8955		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8956		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8957	    }
8958	    else
8959	    {
8960		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8961		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8962		if (*path_end != 0)
8963		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8964		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8965		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8966	    }
8967	}
8968
8969#ifdef WIN3264
8970# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8971	if (wn != NULL)
8972	{
8973	    vim_free(p);
8974	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8975	}
8976	else
8977# endif
8978	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8979#else
8980	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8981#endif
8982
8983	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8984	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8985	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8986	{
8987	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8988#ifdef WIN3264
8989	    FindClose(hFind);
8990# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8991	    if (wn != NULL)
8992	    {
8993		vim_free(wn);
8994		wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
8995		if (wn != NULL)
8996		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8997	    }
8998	    if (wn == NULL)
8999# endif
9000		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
9001	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
9002#else
9003	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
9004		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
9005#endif
9006	    vim_free(matchname);
9007	    matchname = NULL;
9008	}
9009    }
9010
9011#ifdef WIN3264
9012    FindClose(hFind);
9013# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
9014    vim_free(wn);
9015# endif
9016#endif
9017    vim_free(buf);
9018    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
9019    vim_free(matchname);
9020
9021    matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
9022    if (matches > 0)
9023	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
9024						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
9025    return matches;
9026}
9027
9028    int
9029mch_expandpath(
9030    garray_T	*gap,
9031    char_u	*path,
9032    int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
9033{
9034    return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
9035}
9036# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
9037
9038#if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
9039	|| defined(PROTO)
9040/*
9041 * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
9042 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
9043 */
9044static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
9045
9046    static int
9047pstrcmp(a, b)
9048    const void *a, *b;
9049{
9050    return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
9051}
9052
9053/*
9054 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
9055 * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
9056 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
9057 * at "path + wildoff".
9058 * Return the number of matches found.
9059 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
9060 */
9061    int
9062unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
9063    garray_T	*gap;
9064    char_u	*path;
9065    int		wildoff;
9066    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
9067    int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
9068{
9069    char_u	*buf;
9070    char_u	*path_end;
9071    char_u	*p, *s, *e;
9072    int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
9073    char_u	*pat;
9074    regmatch_T	regmatch;
9075    int		starts_with_dot;
9076    int		matches;
9077    int		len;
9078    int		starstar = FALSE;
9079    static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
9080
9081    DIR		*dirp;
9082    struct dirent *dp;
9083
9084    /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
9085    if (stardepth > 0)
9086    {
9087	ui_breakcheck();
9088	if (got_int)
9089	    return 0;
9090    }
9091
9092    /* make room for file name */
9093    buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
9094    if (buf == NULL)
9095	return 0;
9096
9097    /*
9098     * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
9099     * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
9100     */
9101    p = buf;
9102    s = buf;
9103    e = NULL;
9104    path_end = path;
9105    while (*path_end != NUL)
9106    {
9107	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
9108	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
9109	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
9110	    *p++ = *path_end++;
9111	else if (*path_end == '/')
9112	{
9113	    if (e != NULL)
9114		break;
9115	    s = p + 1;
9116	}
9117	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
9118			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
9119	    e = p;
9120#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
9121	if (has_mbyte)
9122	{
9123	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
9124	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
9125	    p += len;
9126	    path_end += len;
9127	}
9128	else
9129#endif
9130	    *p++ = *path_end++;
9131    }
9132    e = p;
9133    *e = NUL;
9134
9135    /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
9136    /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
9137     * component. */
9138    for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
9139	if (rem_backslash(p))
9140	{
9141	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
9142	    --e;
9143	    --s;
9144	}
9145
9146    /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
9147    for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
9148	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
9149	    starstar = TRUE;
9150
9151    /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
9152    starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
9153    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
9154    if (pat == NULL)
9155    {
9156	vim_free(buf);
9157	return 0;
9158    }
9159
9160    /* compile the regexp into a program */
9161#ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
9162    regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Behave like Terminal.app */
9163#else
9164    regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;		/* Don't ever ignore case */
9165#endif
9166    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
9167    vim_free(pat);
9168
9169    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
9170    {
9171	vim_free(buf);
9172	return 0;
9173    }
9174
9175    /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
9176     * is following then find matches without any directory. */
9177    if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
9178							  && *path_end == '/')
9179    {
9180	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
9181	++stardepth;
9182	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
9183	--stardepth;
9184    }
9185
9186    /* open the directory for scanning */
9187    *s = NUL;
9188    dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
9189
9190    /* Find all matching entries */
9191    if (dirp != NULL)
9192    {
9193	for (;;)
9194	{
9195	    dp = readdir(dirp);
9196	    if (dp == NULL)
9197		break;
9198	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
9199		    && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
9200	    {
9201		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
9202		len = STRLEN(buf);
9203
9204		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
9205		{
9206		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
9207		     * find matches. */
9208		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
9209		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
9210		    ++stardepth;
9211		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
9212		    --stardepth;
9213		}
9214
9215		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
9216		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
9217		{
9218		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
9219		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
9220		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
9221		}
9222		else
9223		{
9224		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
9225		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
9226		    if (*path_end != NUL)
9227			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
9228		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
9229		    {
9230#ifdef MACOS_CONVERT
9231			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
9232			char_u *precomp_buf =
9233			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
9234
9235			if (precomp_buf)
9236			{
9237			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
9238			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
9239			}
9240#endif
9241			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
9242		    }
9243		}
9244	    }
9245	}
9246
9247	closedir(dirp);
9248    }
9249
9250    vim_free(buf);
9251    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
9252
9253    matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
9254    if (matches > 0)
9255	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
9256						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
9257    return matches;
9258}
9259#endif
9260
9261#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
9262static int find_previous_pathsep __ARGS((char_u *path, char_u **psep));
9263static int is_unique __ARGS((char_u *maybe_unique, garray_T *gap, int i));
9264static void expand_path_option __ARGS((char_u *curdir, garray_T	*gap));
9265static char_u *get_path_cutoff __ARGS((char_u *fname, garray_T *gap));
9266static void uniquefy_paths __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pattern));
9267static int expand_in_path __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u	*pattern, int flags));
9268
9269/*
9270 * Moves "*psep" back to the previous path separator in "path".
9271 * Returns FAIL is "*psep" ends up at the beginning of "path".
9272 */
9273    static int
9274find_previous_pathsep(path, psep)
9275    char_u *path;
9276    char_u **psep;
9277{
9278    /* skip the current separator */
9279    if (*psep > path && vim_ispathsep(**psep))
9280	--*psep;
9281
9282    /* find the previous separator */
9283    while (*psep > path)
9284    {
9285	if (vim_ispathsep(**psep))
9286	    return OK;
9287	mb_ptr_back(path, *psep);
9288    }
9289
9290    return FAIL;
9291}
9292
9293/*
9294 * Returns TRUE if "maybe_unique" is unique wrt other_paths in "gap".
9295 * "maybe_unique" is the end portion of "((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[i]".
9296 */
9297    static int
9298is_unique(maybe_unique, gap, i)
9299    char_u	*maybe_unique;
9300    garray_T	*gap;
9301    int		i;
9302{
9303    int	    j;
9304    int	    candidate_len;
9305    int	    other_path_len;
9306    char_u  **other_paths = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
9307    char_u  *rival;
9308
9309    for (j = 0; j < gap->ga_len; j++)
9310    {
9311	if (j == i)
9312	    continue;  /* don't compare it with itself */
9313
9314	candidate_len = (int)STRLEN(maybe_unique);
9315	other_path_len = (int)STRLEN(other_paths[j]);
9316	if (other_path_len < candidate_len)
9317	    continue;  /* it's different when it's shorter */
9318
9319	rival = other_paths[j] + other_path_len - candidate_len;
9320	if (fnamecmp(maybe_unique, rival) == 0)
9321	    return FALSE;  /* match */
9322    }
9323
9324    return TRUE;  /* no match found */
9325}
9326
9327/*
9328 * Split the 'path' option into an array of strings in garray_T.  Relative
9329 * paths are expanded to their equivalent fullpath.  This includes the "."
9330 * (relative to current buffer directory) and empty path (relative to current
9331 * directory) notations.
9332 *
9333 * TODO: handle upward search (;) and path limiter (**N) notations by
9334 * expanding each into their equivalent path(s).
9335 */
9336    static void
9337expand_path_option(curdir, gap)
9338    char_u	*curdir;
9339    garray_T	*gap;
9340{
9341    char_u	*path_option = *curbuf->b_p_path == NUL
9342						  ? p_path : curbuf->b_p_path;
9343    char_u	*buf;
9344    char_u	*p;
9345    int		len;
9346
9347    if ((buf = alloc((int)MAXPATHL)) == NULL)
9348	return;
9349
9350    while (*path_option != NUL)
9351    {
9352	copy_option_part(&path_option, buf, MAXPATHL, " ,");
9353
9354	if (buf[0] == '.' && (buf[1] == NUL || vim_ispathsep(buf[1])))
9355	{
9356	    /* Relative to current buffer:
9357	     * "/path/file" + "." -> "/path/"
9358	     * "/path/file"  + "./subdir" -> "/path/subdir" */
9359	    if (curbuf->b_ffname == NULL)
9360		continue;
9361	    p = gettail(curbuf->b_ffname);
9362	    len = (int)(p - curbuf->b_ffname);
9363	    if (len + (int)STRLEN(buf) >= MAXPATHL)
9364		continue;
9365	    if (buf[1] == NUL)
9366		buf[len] = NUL;
9367	    else
9368		STRMOVE(buf + len, buf + 2);
9369	    mch_memmove(buf, curbuf->b_ffname, len);
9370	    simplify_filename(buf);
9371	}
9372	else if (buf[0] == NUL)
9373	    /* relative to current directory */
9374	    STRCPY(buf, curdir);
9375	else if (path_with_url(buf))
9376	    /* URL can't be used here */
9377	    continue;
9378	else if (!mch_isFullName(buf))
9379	{
9380	    /* Expand relative path to their full path equivalent */
9381	    len = (int)STRLEN(curdir);
9382	    if (len + (int)STRLEN(buf) + 3 > MAXPATHL)
9383		continue;
9384	    STRMOVE(buf + len + 1, buf);
9385	    STRCPY(buf, curdir);
9386	    buf[len] = PATHSEP;
9387	    simplify_filename(buf);
9388	}
9389
9390	if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
9391	    break;
9392	p = vim_strsave(buf);
9393	if (p == NULL)
9394	    break;
9395	((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
9396    }
9397
9398    vim_free(buf);
9399}
9400
9401/*
9402 * Returns a pointer to the file or directory name in "fname" that matches the
9403 * longest path in "ga"p, or NULL if there is no match. For example:
9404 *
9405 *    path: /foo/bar/baz
9406 *   fname: /foo/bar/baz/quux.txt
9407 * returns:		 ^this
9408 */
9409    static char_u *
9410get_path_cutoff(fname, gap)
9411    char_u *fname;
9412    garray_T *gap;
9413{
9414    int	    i;
9415    int	    maxlen = 0;
9416    char_u  **path_part = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
9417    char_u  *cutoff = NULL;
9418
9419    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len; i++)
9420    {
9421	int j = 0;
9422
9423	while ((fname[j] == path_part[i][j]
9424# if defined(MSWIN) || defined(MSDOS)
9425		|| (vim_ispathsep(fname[j]) && vim_ispathsep(path_part[i][j]))
9426#endif
9427			     ) && fname[j] != NUL && path_part[i][j] != NUL)
9428	    j++;
9429	if (j > maxlen)
9430	{
9431	    maxlen = j;
9432	    cutoff = &fname[j];
9433	}
9434    }
9435
9436    /* skip to the file or directory name */
9437    if (cutoff != NULL)
9438	while (vim_ispathsep(*cutoff))
9439	    mb_ptr_adv(cutoff);
9440
9441    return cutoff;
9442}
9443
9444/*
9445 * Sorts, removes duplicates and modifies all the fullpath names in "gap" so
9446 * that they are unique with respect to each other while conserving the part
9447 * that matches the pattern. Beware, this is at least O(n^2) wrt "gap->ga_len".
9448 */
9449    static void
9450uniquefy_paths(gap, pattern)
9451    garray_T	*gap;
9452    char_u	*pattern;
9453{
9454    int		i;
9455    int		len;
9456    char_u	**fnames = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
9457    int		sort_again = FALSE;
9458    char_u	*pat;
9459    char_u      *file_pattern;
9460    char_u	*curdir;
9461    regmatch_T	regmatch;
9462    garray_T	path_ga;
9463    char_u	**in_curdir = NULL;
9464    char_u	*short_name;
9465
9466    remove_duplicates(gap);
9467    ga_init2(&path_ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 1);
9468
9469    /*
9470     * We need to prepend a '*' at the beginning of file_pattern so that the
9471     * regex matches anywhere in the path. FIXME: is this valid for all
9472     * possible patterns?
9473     */
9474    len = (int)STRLEN(pattern);
9475    file_pattern = alloc(len + 2);
9476    if (file_pattern == NULL)
9477	return;
9478    file_pattern[0] = '*';
9479    file_pattern[1] = NUL;
9480    STRCAT(file_pattern, pattern);
9481    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(file_pattern, NULL, NULL, TRUE);
9482    vim_free(file_pattern);
9483    if (pat == NULL)
9484	return;
9485
9486    regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* always ignore case */
9487    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC + RE_STRING);
9488    vim_free(pat);
9489    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
9490	return;
9491
9492    if ((curdir = alloc((int)(MAXPATHL))) == NULL)
9493	goto theend;
9494    mch_dirname(curdir, MAXPATHL);
9495    expand_path_option(curdir, &path_ga);
9496
9497    in_curdir = (char_u **)alloc_clear(gap->ga_len * sizeof(char_u *));
9498    if (in_curdir == NULL)
9499	goto theend;
9500
9501    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len && !got_int; i++)
9502    {
9503	char_u	    *path = fnames[i];
9504	int	    is_in_curdir;
9505	char_u	    *dir_end = gettail_dir(path);
9506	char_u	    *pathsep_p;
9507	char_u	    *path_cutoff;
9508
9509	len = (int)STRLEN(path);
9510	is_in_curdir = fnamencmp(curdir, path, dir_end - path) == 0
9511					     && curdir[dir_end - path] == NUL;
9512	if (is_in_curdir)
9513	    in_curdir[i] = vim_strsave(path);
9514
9515	/* Shorten the filename while maintaining its uniqueness */
9516	path_cutoff = get_path_cutoff(path, &path_ga);
9517
9518	/* we start at the end of the path */
9519	pathsep_p = path + len - 1;
9520
9521	while (find_previous_pathsep(path, &pathsep_p))
9522	    if (vim_regexec(&regmatch, pathsep_p + 1, (colnr_T)0)
9523		    && is_unique(pathsep_p + 1, gap, i)
9524		    && path_cutoff != NULL && pathsep_p + 1 >= path_cutoff)
9525	    {
9526		sort_again = TRUE;
9527		mch_memmove(path, pathsep_p + 1, STRLEN(pathsep_p));
9528		break;
9529	    }
9530
9531	if (mch_isFullName(path))
9532	{
9533	    /*
9534	     * Last resort: shorten relative to curdir if possible.
9535	     * 'possible' means:
9536	     * 1. It is under the current directory.
9537	     * 2. The result is actually shorter than the original.
9538	     *
9539	     *	    Before		  curdir	After
9540	     *	    /foo/bar/file.txt	  /foo/bar	./file.txt
9541	     *	    c:\foo\bar\file.txt   c:\foo\bar	.\file.txt
9542	     *	    /file.txt		  /		/file.txt
9543	     *	    c:\file.txt		  c:\		.\file.txt
9544	     */
9545	    short_name = shorten_fname(path, curdir);
9546	    if (short_name != NULL && short_name > path + 1
9547#if defined(MSWIN) || defined(MSDOS)
9548		    /* On windows,
9549		     *	    shorten_fname("c:\a\a.txt", "c:\a\b")
9550		     * returns "\a\a.txt", which is not really the short
9551		     * name, hence: */
9552		    && !vim_ispathsep(*short_name)
9553#endif
9554		)
9555	    {
9556		STRCPY(path, ".");
9557		add_pathsep(path);
9558		STRMOVE(path + STRLEN(path), short_name);
9559	    }
9560	}
9561	ui_breakcheck();
9562    }
9563
9564    /* Shorten filenames in /in/current/directory/{filename} */
9565    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len && !got_int; i++)
9566    {
9567	char_u *rel_path;
9568	char_u *path = in_curdir[i];
9569
9570	if (path == NULL)
9571	    continue;
9572
9573	/* If the {filename} is not unique, change it to ./{filename}.
9574	 * Else reduce it to {filename} */
9575	short_name = shorten_fname(path, curdir);
9576	if (short_name == NULL)
9577	    short_name = path;
9578	if (is_unique(short_name, gap, i))
9579	{
9580	    STRCPY(fnames[i], short_name);
9581	    continue;
9582	}
9583
9584	rel_path = alloc((int)(STRLEN(short_name) + STRLEN(PATHSEPSTR) + 2));
9585	if (rel_path == NULL)
9586	    goto theend;
9587	STRCPY(rel_path, ".");
9588	add_pathsep(rel_path);
9589	STRCAT(rel_path, short_name);
9590
9591	vim_free(fnames[i]);
9592	fnames[i] = rel_path;
9593	sort_again = TRUE;
9594	ui_breakcheck();
9595    }
9596
9597theend:
9598    vim_free(curdir);
9599    if (in_curdir != NULL)
9600    {
9601	for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len; i++)
9602	    vim_free(in_curdir[i]);
9603	vim_free(in_curdir);
9604    }
9605    ga_clear_strings(&path_ga);
9606    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
9607
9608    if (sort_again)
9609	remove_duplicates(gap);
9610}
9611
9612/*
9613 * Calls globpath() with 'path' values for the given pattern and stores the
9614 * result in "gap".
9615 * Returns the total number of matches.
9616 */
9617    static int
9618expand_in_path(gap, pattern, flags)
9619    garray_T	*gap;
9620    char_u	*pattern;
9621    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
9622{
9623    char_u	*curdir;
9624    garray_T	path_ga;
9625    char_u	*files = NULL;
9626    char_u	*s;	/* start */
9627    char_u	*e;	/* end */
9628    char_u	*paths = NULL;
9629
9630    if ((curdir = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL)) == NULL)
9631	return 0;
9632    mch_dirname(curdir, MAXPATHL);
9633
9634    ga_init2(&path_ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 1);
9635    expand_path_option(curdir, &path_ga);
9636    vim_free(curdir);
9637    if (path_ga.ga_len == 0)
9638	return 0;
9639
9640    paths = ga_concat_strings(&path_ga);
9641    ga_clear_strings(&path_ga);
9642    if (paths == NULL)
9643	return 0;
9644
9645    files = globpath(paths, pattern, 0);
9646    vim_free(paths);
9647    if (files == NULL)
9648	return 0;
9649
9650    /* Copy each path in files into gap */
9651    s = e = files;
9652    while (*s != NUL)
9653    {
9654	while (*e != '\n' && *e != NUL)
9655	    e++;
9656	if (*e == NUL)
9657	{
9658	    addfile(gap, s, flags);
9659	    break;
9660	}
9661	else
9662	{
9663	    /* *e is '\n' */
9664	    *e = NUL;
9665	    addfile(gap, s, flags);
9666	    e++;
9667	    s = e;
9668	}
9669    }
9670    vim_free(files);
9671
9672    return gap->ga_len;
9673}
9674#endif
9675
9676#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
9677/*
9678 * Sort "gap" and remove duplicate entries.  "gap" is expected to contain a
9679 * list of file names in allocated memory.
9680 */
9681    void
9682remove_duplicates(gap)
9683    garray_T	*gap;
9684{
9685    int	    i;
9686    int	    j;
9687    char_u  **fnames = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
9688
9689    sort_strings(fnames, gap->ga_len);
9690    for (i = gap->ga_len - 1; i > 0; --i)
9691	if (fnamecmp(fnames[i - 1], fnames[i]) == 0)
9692	{
9693	    vim_free(fnames[i]);
9694	    for (j = i + 1; j < gap->ga_len; ++j)
9695		fnames[j - 1] = fnames[j];
9696	    --gap->ga_len;
9697	}
9698}
9699#endif
9700
9701/*
9702 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
9703 *
9704 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
9705 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
9706 *
9707 * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
9708 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
9709 * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
9710 * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
9711 */
9712    int
9713gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
9714    int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
9715    char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
9716    int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
9717    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
9718    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
9719{
9720    int			i;
9721    garray_T		ga;
9722    char_u		*p;
9723    static int		recursive = FALSE;
9724    int			add_pat;
9725#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
9726    int			did_expand_in_path = FALSE;
9727#endif
9728
9729    /*
9730     * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
9731     * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
9732     * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
9733     * return FAIL.
9734     */
9735    if (recursive)
9736#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9737	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9738#else
9739	return FAIL;
9740#endif
9741
9742#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9743    /*
9744     * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
9745     * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
9746     * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
9747     * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
9748     */
9749    for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
9750    {
9751	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
9752# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9753		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
9754# endif
9755	   )
9756	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9757    }
9758#endif
9759
9760    recursive = TRUE;
9761
9762    /*
9763     * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
9764     */
9765    ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
9766
9767    for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
9768    {
9769	add_pat = -1;
9770	p = pat[i];
9771
9772#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9773	if (vim_backtick(p))
9774	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
9775	else
9776#endif
9777	{
9778	    /*
9779	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
9780	     */
9781	    if (vim_strchr(p, '$') != NULL || *p == '~')
9782	    {
9783		p = expand_env_save_opt(p, TRUE);
9784		if (p == NULL)
9785		    p = pat[i];
9786#ifdef UNIX
9787		/*
9788		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
9789		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
9790		 * found file names and start all over again.
9791		 */
9792		else if (vim_strchr(p, '$') != NULL || *p == '~')
9793		{
9794		    vim_free(p);
9795		    ga_clear_strings(&ga);
9796		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
9797								       flags);
9798		    recursive = FALSE;
9799		    return i;
9800		}
9801#endif
9802	    }
9803
9804	    /*
9805	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
9806	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
9807	     * the pattern.
9808	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
9809	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
9810	     */
9811	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
9812	    {
9813#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
9814		if ((flags & EW_PATH)
9815			&& !mch_isFullName(p)
9816			&& !(p[0] == '.'
9817			    && (vim_ispathsep(p[1])
9818				|| (p[1] == '.' && vim_ispathsep(p[2]))))
9819		   )
9820		{
9821		    /* :find completion where 'path' is used.
9822		     * Recursiveness is OK here. */
9823		    recursive = FALSE;
9824		    add_pat = expand_in_path(&ga, p, flags);
9825		    recursive = TRUE;
9826		    did_expand_in_path = TRUE;
9827		}
9828		else
9829#endif
9830		    add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
9831	    }
9832	}
9833
9834	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
9835	{
9836	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
9837
9838#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
9839	    slash_to_colon(t);
9840#endif
9841	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
9842	     * "vim c:/" work. */
9843	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
9844		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
9845	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
9846		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
9847	    vim_free(t);
9848	}
9849
9850#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
9851	if (did_expand_in_path && ga.ga_len > 0 && (flags & EW_PATH))
9852	    uniquefy_paths(&ga, p);
9853#endif
9854	if (p != pat[i])
9855	    vim_free(p);
9856    }
9857
9858    *num_file = ga.ga_len;
9859    *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
9860
9861    recursive = FALSE;
9862
9863    return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
9864}
9865
9866# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9867
9868/*
9869 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
9870 */
9871    static int
9872vim_backtick(p)
9873    char_u	*p;
9874{
9875    return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
9876}
9877
9878/*
9879 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
9880 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
9881 * Returns number of file names found.
9882 */
9883    static int
9884expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
9885    garray_T	*gap;
9886    char_u	*pat;
9887    int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
9888{
9889    char_u	*p;
9890    char_u	*cmd;
9891    char_u	*buffer;
9892    int		cnt = 0;
9893    int		i;
9894
9895    /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
9896    cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
9897    if (cmd == NULL)
9898	return 0;
9899
9900#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
9901    if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
9902	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE);
9903    else
9904#endif
9905	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
9906				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
9907    vim_free(cmd);
9908    if (buffer == NULL)
9909	return 0;
9910
9911    cmd = buffer;
9912    while (*cmd != NUL)
9913    {
9914	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
9915	p = cmd;
9916	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
9917	    ++p;
9918	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
9919	if (p > cmd)
9920	{
9921	    i = *p;
9922	    *p = NUL;
9923	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
9924	    *p = i;
9925	    ++cnt;
9926	}
9927	cmd = p;
9928	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
9929	    ++cmd;
9930    }
9931
9932    vim_free(buffer);
9933    return cnt;
9934}
9935# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
9936
9937/*
9938 * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
9939 * EW_DIR	add directories
9940 * EW_FILE	add files
9941 * EW_EXEC	add executable files
9942 * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
9943 * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
9944 */
9945    void
9946addfile(gap, f, flags)
9947    garray_T	*gap;
9948    char_u	*f;	/* filename */
9949    int		flags;
9950{
9951    char_u	*p;
9952    int		isdir;
9953
9954    /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
9955    if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
9956	return;
9957
9958#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
9959    /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
9960    if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
9961	return;
9962#endif
9963
9964    isdir = mch_isdir(f);
9965    if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
9966	return;
9967
9968    /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it.  Do accept directories. */
9969    if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f))
9970	return;
9971
9972    /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
9973    if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
9974	return;
9975
9976    p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
9977    if (p == NULL)
9978	return;
9979
9980    STRCPY(p, f);
9981#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
9982    slash_adjust(p);
9983#endif
9984    /*
9985     * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
9986     */
9987#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
9988    if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
9989	add_pathsep(p);
9990#endif
9991    ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
9992}
9993#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
9994
9995#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
9996
9997#ifndef SEEK_SET
9998# define SEEK_SET 0
9999#endif
10000#ifndef SEEK_END
10001# define SEEK_END 2
10002#endif
10003
10004/*
10005 * Get the stdout of an external command.
10006 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
10007 */
10008    char_u *
10009get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
10010    char_u	*cmd;
10011    char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
10012    int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
10013{
10014    char_u	*tempname;
10015    char_u	*command;
10016    char_u	*buffer = NULL;
10017    int		len;
10018    int		i = 0;
10019    FILE	*fd;
10020
10021    if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
10022	return NULL;
10023
10024    /* get a name for the temp file */
10025    if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
10026    {
10027	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
10028	return NULL;
10029    }
10030
10031    /* Add the redirection stuff */
10032    command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
10033    if (command == NULL)
10034	goto done;
10035
10036    /*
10037     * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
10038     * Don't check timestamps here.
10039     */
10040    ++no_check_timestamps;
10041    call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
10042    --no_check_timestamps;
10043
10044    vim_free(command);
10045
10046    /*
10047     * read the names from the file into memory
10048     */
10049# ifdef VMS
10050    /* created temporary file is not always readable as binary */
10051    fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
10052# else
10053    fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
10054# endif
10055
10056    if (fd == NULL)
10057    {
10058	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
10059	goto done;
10060    }
10061
10062    fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
10063    len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
10064    fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
10065
10066    buffer = alloc(len + 1);
10067    if (buffer != NULL)
10068	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
10069    fclose(fd);
10070    mch_remove(tempname);
10071    if (buffer == NULL)
10072	goto done;
10073#ifdef VMS
10074    len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
10075#endif
10076    if (i != len)
10077    {
10078	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
10079	vim_free(buffer);
10080	buffer = NULL;
10081    }
10082    else
10083	buffer[len] = NUL;	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
10084
10085done:
10086    vim_free(tempname);
10087    return buffer;
10088}
10089#endif
10090
10091/*
10092 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
10093 * functions.
10094 */
10095    void
10096FreeWild(count, files)
10097    int	    count;
10098    char_u  **files;
10099{
10100    if (count <= 0 || files == NULL)
10101	return;
10102#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
10103    /*
10104     * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
10105     * been used???
10106     */
10107    _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
10108#else
10109    while (count--)
10110	vim_free(files[count]);
10111    vim_free(files);
10112#endif
10113}
10114
10115/*
10116 * Return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
10117 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
10118 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
10119 */
10120    int
10121goto_im()
10122{
10123    return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
10124}
10125